.;~.

TNC30
TNC 42/65
TX8F

-~------·--

Programming Instructions
SN 642 7 45 - 04.95
 Contents

Programming fundamentals Chapter 1

Editor Chapter 2

Programming technique I Chapter 3

Programming technique II Chapter 4

Options Chapter 5

Machining example Chapter 6

Setting up Chapter 10

IN/OUT data transmission Chapter 11

Error displays Chapter 20

01.95
 Programming fundamentals
ITRAUIJ

Contents

Machine data

Zero and reference points 1.3

Working area for tools 1.8
Protective zones in the working area l. 12

Axes and axis directions l. 15

G54 - G57 / G59 Zero point shift 1.16

NC program

Program structure and block format 1.20

G instructions 1.24
0 instructions 1.26
B instructions 1.28

M instructions

M instructions 1.29

04.94 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I 1.1
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Programming fundamentals

1.2 04.94 PRAL

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Pro~ranming fundamentals

Machine data.
Zero points and reference points
A coordinate' system is used for controlling
the tool:movements.
The position of the coordinate system is
determined within the CNC turning centre
by zero points. .

I \ i'! . ,' .. ,, ....

Fig.:. Zero. points and reference points
. · of CNC turning centres
The working area .in which the tools move during
machining .operations has.zero points and reference
points.
Zero points Reference .points
-e: · M= ma.chine ze.ro point. · ~ R = reference point ( home pas.)
. ~ · W= workpiece zero point ~ T = tool carrier reference point
E = tool setting point
N =. tool register referen.ce point
·The zero points and reference points,are ex~
plained.on the .followtng pages.

04.94 PRAL - .- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
.1.3
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 ProgrillllJling fundamentals

Machine zero point aMu

The machine zero point M of turning centres is located
on the spindle centre line where it intersects the
face of the work-holding equipment.
The machine zero point determines the machine coordi-
nate system; all other reference points relate to this
machine zero point ..

Workpiece zero point "Wu

The workpiece zero point Wdefines the workpiece coordi-
nate system referring to the machine zero point. It is
· determined by the programmer or operator by entering
its distance from the machine zero point.
The workpiece zero point can be selected as follows:
Chuck work (Fig. a)
1) Workpiece zero point, front
The distance is calculated as follows:
Chuck height
+ jaw height
+ blank length
- facing allowance, first operation (r.h. allowance)
2) Workpiece zero point, rear
The distance is calculated as follows:
Chuck height
+ jaw height
+ facing allowance, second operation (l.h. allowance)

Bar work (Fig. b)

1) Workpiece zero point, front
The distance is calculated as follows:
Chuck height
+ distance chuck to.part-off tool
+ width of part-off tool
+ workpiece length
2) Workpiece zero point, rear
The distance is calculated as follows:
Chuck height
+ distance chuck to part-off tool
+ width of part-off tool

1.4 PRAL04.94
. 1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming fundamentals

X blank length
I•-------------
I
•~,
facing allowynce, I facing allowance,
second _ , : first operation
machine operati 00 ;.. !~ 4 • • - - ".o....r...k.,p...i_e_c_e_l_e_n,.g_t_h___-33"• !1 4 ~ - - - -
coordinate system ll II
II

w w z

machine·
zero point
/r,,..i==,-,;i;11~1
..__+-..,
I
~----_J
:
I
I
I
I
workpiece
zero point.,,
front

I I I
jaw · ,._I 1...,,__v. I
workpiece height 1 1.......-:;--- I
zero point, I
rear ZMW Jo, I
I

Fig. a: Machine zero point and workpiece zero point for c:huck work_

i X dfatance from chuck

to part-off tool ·

•
Ii-o11---c-'h"uc.a.k.....h_e"'i"gh"'t'-----llilo..,.f I...E---f,--
- 1

11, rear
workpiece
zero point, front

IL, w
V
- ""9-;''-".. ,
.- " I
- --· z
mach i n /
I .,,
zero point ) '
--
., ·" ., facing allowance •
parting-off wi dtA ~ ,...411-----".ao.a.raak..
P.a.i.ae.ace.a.-l..e;;;n;;;gth='-lllilo~I
.I
ZMW I
I

Fig. b: Machine zero point and workpie= zero point. for bar work _

04.94 PRAL 1.5

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 fiRAUaj Progranming fundamentals

Reference point "R" (Fig. a)

The positions of the reference points of the individual
uxes are predefined in the coordinate system. They
control and calibrate the position measuring system.

Note:
- Due to the application of the absolute measuring system,
the reference point must not be approached after each
switching on of the machine (control) .

. Tool.setting point •E• (Fig. b)

The tool setting point is located on a definite spot on
the toolholder. It enables external measurement of the
tools by means of an optical presetting device.
The measured tool overhang lengths Q and Lare entered
into the tool data store of the control (Q as diameter).

Tool register reference point •N• (Fig. b)

The tool register reference point is the counterpart of
the tool setting point and located on the face of the
turret. If the toolholder is fully inserted in the turret
bore, N and E are· identical.

Tool carrier reference point •1• (Fig. c)

This point is located on the toolholder register of the
turret. From the tool overhang lengths X and Z entered
into the tool file (via ATC) the control calculates the
distance of the tool point to the tool carrier reference
point so that the turret can be controlled properly for
machining contours.
Note:
- Tool data must be stored in the control before
starting work.

IP. . R....

T coordinates of tools related

to tool carrier reference point
tool station

1.6 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programming fundamentals ITRAUifJ
R

machine
zero point X

1M z
'
I
J

Fig. a: Location of reference point related to machine zero point -

Example: TNC 42 $1

Q
I
I
I
I .tool tool carrier
L 1··r .tool
1
register
1---='---; setting point reference point

Fig. b: Tool setting point and .tool register reference point

(external presetting)

I I
I
I
f•
z • ., I
I
I
I

Fig. c: . Tool carrier reference point (TRAUB-ATC)

04.94·PRAL
TX SF TNC4l!'!0~/"!!'42!!"_"'!6'!!'5_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 1.7
 Progranming fundamentals

Working area for tools

To determine the working area for workpieces (i.e. maximum
turning diameter and maximum turning length), start with
the theoretical working area which is limited by the maximum
tool carrier traverse travels.
The accurate dimensions of the theoretical working area are
obtained by taking into account the end positions of the
tool carrier reference point "T" in all four directions of
motion.

04.94 PRAL
1.8 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranmiing fundamentals ITRAUiJ
· Working area TNC 30 ---------
-
'!
'
!

-
Turret 1
- -
50 -
-
270

-',j
- l
40 F=T R
-
15
0
co
-
"'
,-
GSP
-
I M ....0 RG G
I HSP =
....0 ATC 330 main spindle
_,, ' GSP =
HSP
0
co
"'-
-R opposed spindle
- F=T

105 50 270 ~-
-
!
'
175 -- -
-
2:
I
~~

Turret
~~

250
91.5

350
370

Max. tool overhang lengths

- Passing the opposed spindle 68 mm M Machine zero point
- Indexing over bed cover with Y-18/ 82 mm R Ref. point of turret
Y axis in extreme position Y+l8/118 mm G Zero point of opposed spindle
- Indexing over bed cover RG Refi point of opposed spindle
without Y axis 100 mm F=T Tool carrier or tool ref.point
ATC Ref. point of tool microscope

04.94 P R A L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • 1.9
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
------------~--- -

ITRAU~ Programming fundamentals

• Working area TNC 42-65

----- -----

160

I 167.5 I @
150

-~
-
-~ _Turret 1

- '
e-- 450

~-
F=T
R
-...
0
<Xl GSP
Collet· chuc~ for AG
-
a, "',-.:
"'
~

M
,-.._ <Xl
<D ATC +- RG G
"

Collet chuc~ for AS , I /

<Xl
<D ATC ' __ L 520
I U)
HSP =
,-.: <Xl main spindle
-... -"'_cf<
0
HSP "' GSP =
F=T oppos ed spindle
100 128 450 - ~
'
,,

!
364 -
! Turret 2
L- ~-
\ ~- !

!
568
167_,

718
728
'

Max. tool overhang lengths

''
- Passing the opposed spind_le 111 mm M Machine zero point
- Indexing over bed cover with Y-35/ 79 mm R Ref. point of turret
Y axis in extreme position Y+35/149 mm G Zero point of opposed spindle
- Indexing over bed cover RG Ref. point of opposed spindle
without Y axis 114 mm F=T Tool carrier or tool ref.point
ATC Ref. point of tool microscope

04.94 PRAL
1.10 TX TNC 30/42-65
 ,
Progrilllllli ng ·fu"ndamenta ls

wo.rking area for

tool point

Fig. a: Changes of working area

due to tool dimensions
The theoretical working area is shifted by the
tool dimensions, and the maximum turning length
and turning diameter are reduced.

theoretical working .area

working area shortened

Fig. b: Changes of working area

due to work-holding means
The working area for workpieces is additionally
shortened by the size of the work-holding means.
Note:
- The dimensions of.the working area are limited
by the existing machine components (e.g. chuck,
tail stock, steady .rest).
If this is not taken into account when programming,
collisions may occur when traversing the turret.

04.94PRAL 1.11
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming fundamentals

Safety zones in the working area

The TX 8F control enables the definition of safety
zones around the work-holding means and the tail-
stock.
In automatic operation, these barriers prevent col-
lision of the selected tool with the work-holding
means and the tailstock.·
The barriers are defined by determining up to three
barrier points in TEACH-IN and by storing them in
<TOOLJPARAM> Set Up 2 (Fig. c). -They determine the
shape of the safety zones (Fi.g. b). It is, however,
important that the barrier corner points are set for
the correct tool (Fi.g. b) at the right distance from
the work-holding means and the tailstock.
Caut.ion:
- The reference point must have been approached.
The barriers refer only to the measured tool point
of th~ tool to be used. Co_llisioris with projecting
parts of the toolholder are not automatically avoided:
If required, an additional offset of the barriers
can be entered by BARRIERS OFFSET (Fig. a).

I
I
----1---- ................, ... TOOL 5.1/3

..... ....
...,. .... ........
I
I I •X• «· •Z•
I
:z I
.' .... ....
..... ..,.
.... • w
..co
I z
......... .....
I I
••'
• ....
..... .....
........ .............
..... ............
•• .....
.
offseti
I 7
.... :1 ~
..... ..................... .............
I

.,.",. -...... ........

I
I 111
I
11
.....
....,.
c,co

.. . . .... .... 0.000

....
- ~81-11=-
I • I
•
•~
Fig. a

1.12 PRAL04.94
1X8FTNC 30/42-65
 Progranming fundamentals

#6

I
J
CHUCK TAILSTOCK/
OPPOSED SPINDLE

Fig. b: Barriers around main spindle and tailstock or opposed spindle

It is best to define the points as follows:
- Point # 1 with external machining tools
- Points# 2 and# 3 with internal machining tools
{see chapter SETTING UP).

!SET UP DATA 21 $1 Pare. 5

IIIC PosJ
X1 0.000
<BARRIER.> Z1 0.000
C1 0.000
s 1 X O.ODD z O.ODD
2 X 0.00D 2 0.00D
3 X 0.000 z O.ODD
4 X 0.0D0 z 0.0D0

-2~
5 X 0.0D0 z D.ODO
15 X 0.000 z 0.000
TOOL CHANGING ~OINT
7 X3D0.0DD Z4DD.ODD
··rt=
'IRDY2RDY .
ol • II ) ( I

SPS Ausb ProgPara Achsen Set Up 1 llenue

Fig. C

04.94
1.13
TX BF PRAL --------------------
TNC 30/42-65
 Programning fundamentals

The barriers in the NC program can be activated and

de-activated by 665 and 666.
Barriers OFF Barriers ON
ff= t
r r
G65 G68
B

Jinstruction M instruction
B instruction B instructions
spindle speed or spindle speed or
cutting speed cutt-ing speed

,.:===================~i1• / 1/ limit switch

EMERGENCY point
STOP

"-. software
limit switch point

EMERGENCY STOP limit switches

To prevent the compound slide from leaving the working area
in any direction {and to reach the end. stoo of the recircu-
lating ball screw), mechanical EMERGENCY STOP limit switches
are mounted on the machine which will switch off instantaneously
all drive motors. ·

Software limit switches

These are not mechanical switches but X and Z end coordinates
stored in the control. If a traverse instruction in the NC pro-
gram exceeds these coordinates, the movement is carried out
only up to the software end points. The machine will stop and
an alarm will be displayed on the screen.
The software limit switches are positioned in front of the .
EMERGENCY STOP limit switch. They represent a further protec-
tion; the compound slide can still be moved by the pulse gen-
erator and the-feed keys after it contacts these limit switches.

1.14 PRAL04.94
1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
ProgrillTllling fundamentals

Axes and axis directions

Axes on CNC turning centres
X and Z axis
On CNC turning centres the feed axes X and Z are compound
slide directions.
Xis the designation for.the transverse axis:. X values
are entered in the form of diameters. Z is the designation
for the longitudinal axis.
Axis directions on CNC turning centres
The workpiece zero point "W" defines the workpiece coordi-
nate system related to the machine zero point. The position
__ ,,___ CJf -_~he tool point determines the signs (+, -) of X and Z.

machine workpiece machine . workpiece

zero point Zero. point zero point zero point
X• X• L___,-

Fig.: Position of axes in X and Z direction

Additional axes for CNC turning centres

C axis
The C axis permits programming of the angle of rotation
around the Z axis
for correct positioning of the main spindle
- for rotation of the main spindle in feed.
Y axis
The Y axis is in the third machining plane, vertically
to the X and Z axes. It is available with the tool car-
rier Wl for off-centre machining operations such as
drilling and milling.
V axis
Using the V axis, the opposed spindle can be moved along
its longitudinal axis and positioned
- for picking up workpieces at the main spindle
- for pulling forward the bar material.
04.94PRAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1.15
TX BF TNC 30/42--65
 :Progrannning fundamentals

·654 - 657, G59 - Workpiece zero point

r
G54-G57 S •• B •• II .•

[nstrnoHo,s
B instructions
spindle speed or
cutting speed

TOOL
It is possible to store up
IG54-G57J Wericzeug 5. 113 to four different
workpiece zero points.
# 41 G54 X 0.000 71 GSl X 0.000 11 EXT X 0.000 They can be called up
42 z 0.000 72 z 0.000 12 z 0.000 optionally in the program by
-43 C 0.000 73 C 0,000 13 C 0.000 G54 to G57.

# 51 G5S X 0.000 [MCJ X1 0.000

CRT display:
52 z 0.000 Z1 0.000
TOOL/PARAII -> H3-G54-
53 C 0.000 C1 0.000
G57
Furthermore, the current
# 61 G5S X 0.000 correction value in the X
62 z 0.000
DATA axis of the thermal
63 C 0.000 T( )#( )Dat,,n( compensation can be read
off from this screen display
under
111 Ext xo, ... [11111].
ADY
By actuating the softkey
H6, switching can be
carried out between the
subsystems $1 and $2 in
order to be able to read off
the respective compensation
value in X.
Caution:
The instruction G54 holds a_ special position.
G54 is automatically operative (switching-on condition).
If the program contains one of the instructions G54 - G57, all subsequent
traverse movements refer to the cal led up workpiece zero point".

1.16 PRAL04.94
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming fundamentals
fiRAUif,]

659 - Zero point shift

659 X•• z.. S.. B.. M..

T
T ~nstruction
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
coordinates of
workpiece zero point

,;'::-.W (G59)
~,-:::.r:,,
,,,,
,,,,
, ,, -
,: 1">'
W (G54)' ~ z
1------=-------i P03GS901

The G59 zero point shift is additive, i.e. the value of

G59 X.. Z.• is added to the existing zero point shift
(G54 - G57) - (Figs. band c). Normally, Xis always 0.

04.94
TX PRAL 3•0•14•2·--65_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SF TNc" 1.17 '
[tRAUIJ PrograDIIling fundamentals

G54 Z... machine zero point workpiece zero point

G55 Z•••
G56 Z•••
G57 Z•..

••

G54-G57

machine zero point workpiece zero point

- - - - - - - , - --------------r---

••

G59

machine zero point workpiece zero point

••
:•

G54 G59

Fig. a: Position of workpiece zero points

in working area (arbitrary sequence)
04.94 PRAL
1.18 TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progrannning fundamentals

04.94 PRAL 3!'!!0111!'/4'!!"!2!"'_'!'55!"'"_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

TX SF TNC ' 1.19
 Progranming fundamentals

NC program
Program structure and block format

0 instruction
%1--------
--+IOU
program start
4711(1------ program number
659 xo 2280( program block
G26

Text ------11N2 rDRILLING J2)

G97 Sf::2000(------spindle speed
T0202M03
GOO XO Z2 MOB
G01 Z-22F0.1
G27 M09

B]ock number .3 '---¾N~ .{FACING A111

Ull!GlllElllAL RIIUQIING nl
G96 V200 T0303M04 constant cutting· speea
200 m/min
GOO X139 ZO MOS 'H instruction
G01 X4 FD.2I feed 0.2 u:m/rev •.
GOO X135 Z2
G instructions G71 PSO Q60 10.5 KD.11- _program word
D4.5 'F 0.41 number sequence
address letter
G26 M09

N4 (FINISHING nJ
G96 V250 T0404 M04
correction and
tool call•up

NSO G46
GOO X24 21 MOB
G01 X30 D2F0.15
G01 A180
G01 X27 Z-31 A30
Program block absolute dimension programning
between G01 Z-35 RO.SIi----- , transi-tion radius
block number 50
and - G01 X44 031 transition chamfer
block number 60 G01 A180 R10
G01 X90 Z-68 A-eoi-----
angle input
G01 Z-88.
G01 Z-120A160
G01 X136 D2.5
G01 W-3(1------ incremental dimension programning
NSO G40

G26 M09
M 3 0 ( 1 - - - - - - - - program end with reset (skip back)
% I - - - - - - - - - program end ·

- 1.20
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • ,PRAL04.94
TX BF lNC 30/42-65
 Progrilllllling fundamentals.

so·
---~---·········
600
····························-
-ii.---1.*45
R1

0135
--: 7

22
31
35
1-1---4---11- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... '68" .•••••••.
Allowance Allowance
1--,,!l4--.:.-45
rear 1 ll1II 88 front 1 ll1II
120
170

1202

7303 T404

Data required for program creation

1) Program number 4711 4) Machining data
2) Blank Drilling Feed 0.1 rrm/rev.
Diameter 70 mm spindle speed 2000 rpm
Length 120 mm {incl. 1 mm fin- Facing Feed 0.2 mm/rev.
ishing allowance on constant cutting
both sides) speed 200 m/min
3) Tools Roughing Feed 0.4 mm/rev.
Drilling tool station 2, constant cutting
call-up by T0202 speed 200 m/min
Roughing tool tool station 3, Finishing Feed 0.15 mm/rev.
call-up by T0303 constant cutting
Finishing tool tool station 4, speed 25D m/min
call-up by T0404 5) Workpiece zero point 659
Chuck+ jaw height 130 mm
+ blank length 120 mm
- finishing allowance
first· operation 1 mm
= iero J!l:!i!l.:t..Jiti.i ft 249 mm
04.94PRAL 1.21
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning fundamentals·

The program structure of the TX BF control based on the

DIN standard 66025 is as follows:
Structure of a TX SF program
NS G!il7 S40D0 TD303 MD4
N5> G46
GOD X23 Z1 MOS
G01 X3D D2.5 1F0.2

technological information
rl
geometry
information
program-technical
. instructions

The input fonnat of a control detennines the rules for

establishing program blocks in-the NC program.

TX BF program block
T0505

up ·to three H fostructi ons

possible in one program block

number sequence
address 1etter
program.word
max. 2 C instructions
in one prcigram b1oc~
block nlJll!ber

Program blocks are to be considered the smallest working

steps of workpiece machining operations. They consist of
a number of program words which in turn are assembled of
address letters and.number sequences.
Program words within a program block represent instructions
or additional conditions.

* Important:·The ·second G instruction .must not contradict

the first one and must not demand any further
specifications.

1.22 PRAL04.94
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 ProgrilllJlling fundamentals

Program block with 4 program words

x;,o s F02

T 1
·auxiliary conditions
G instruction

6 or M instructions cause the exec~ti.on of a function

within the machine or the control. G instructions (GOO
to G99) are mainly for tool traverse movements.Min-
structions (MOO to M99} are auxiliary func~ions like
coolant ON/OFF (MO7 to MO9).

Auxiliary conditions describe the instructions in more

detail, e.g. X and Z for coordinate input, V for cutting
speed, S for spindle speed and F for feed rate.
Note:
- Some G instructions are self-retaining,·i.e. these in-
structions remain valid in all following program blocks
unt·il they are superseded by different instructions.
Program blocks can be designated by block numbers. These
are placed in front of the block, with N instructions.
The control executes the program in the sequence of block
input; the block number does not influence this sequence.
Basically, block numbers have two.functions:
- Identification of tool cal]-up
T instructions should, as a rule, be preceded by a block
number so that it is possible to re-enter the program
during machining, e.g. after tool breakage.
- Identification of program blocks
Program blocks are used, for example, to identify the
finished contour for roughing cycles. Start and end of
a program block are always marked by a block number.

04.94PRAL 1.23
1X8FTNC 30/42-65
 Progrannning fundamentals

G instructions

GOO* Straight line at rapid traverse

GOl* Straight line at feed rate
GO2 Circular arc, clockwise
GO3 Circular arc, counter-clockwise
GO4 Dwell
GOB Straight line at feed rate (measuring control)
GO9 Straight line at feed rate (precision stop)
GlO Milling function OFF
Gll Milling function ON
Gl6 Milling plane circumference
Gl7 Milling plane face/transverse cut
Gl8 Milling plane X/Z (rotary mode)
Gl9 Milling plane longitudinal cut/chordal flat
G2O Selection of inch programming
G2l Sel~ction. of mm programming
G22 Sub-routine call-up
G24-G27 Approach to tool changing point
G28 Approach to reference point
G33* Threading in single block mode
G34 Threading in single block mode (variable pitch)
G36 Opening of program memory
G37 Opening of tool memory
G38 Opening of parameter memory
G4O Tool nose radius compensation OFF
G41 Tool nose or milling cutter radius compensation ON,
tool left of contour
G42 Tool nose or milling cutter radius compensation ON,
tool right of contour
G46 Tool nose radius compensation ON
G53 Straight line at rapid traverse,
coordinate input related to machine zero point
G54-G57 Zero point shift
G59 Zero point shift (additive)
G63 Rotary encoder main spindle
G64 Rotary encoder opposed spindle
G65 Barrier points OFF
G66 Barrier points ON
G7O Roughing cycle for tool with negative approach angle
G7l Longitudinal roughing cycle
G72 Face roughing cycle
G73 Contour-parallel roughing cycle

04.94 PRAL
1.24 TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Programning fundamentals

674 Longitudinal roughing cycle with interrupted cut

675 Face roughing cycle with interrupted cut
676 Longitudinal threading cycle
677 Longitudinal chamfering cycle
678 Threading cycle (special threads}
679 Face chamfering cycle
681 Repeat cycle (677, 678, 679)
682 Threading cycle (taps, dies)
683 Deep-hole drilling cycle l
684 Deep-hole drilling cycle 2
686 Face threading cycle
688 Descending contour ON {671, 672, 673)
689 688 function OFF
690 Absolute programming C/R/V/Y axis
691 Incremental programming C/R/V/Y axis
692 Speed limitation
694 Feed in mm/min
695 Feed in mm/rev
696 Constant cutting speed
697 _Spindle speed
698 Feed adjustment ON
699 Feed adjustment OFF
6101 Automatic definition of a geometry path I,
longitudinal
6102 Automatic definition of a geometry path I;
transverse
6105 Automatic definition of a geometry path II,
longitudinal
6106 Automatic definition of a geometry path II,
transverse
6201-
6299 Macro call-up

Note:
- The instr4ctions marked with asterisk. * are self-
retaining.
- The underlined instructions are starting conditions.
- If Mor B instructions are programmed in a block with·
6 instructions, they are executed in parallel during
the operation. To ensure that an Mor B instruction
is carried out completely before the 6 instruction,
it must be programmed in the previous block.

04.94PRAL 1.25
TX8FTNC 30/42-65
 Programning fundamentals

0 instructions
The O instruction assigns a program number. The program
number is always positioned at the start of the program
and forms the first program block.

o....
program No.= 8-digit integer
The fig~res l to 9999 9999 can be useq ~s program numbers.

Note:
- Macro programs 9801 to 9899
- TRAUB macros · 9701 to 9799

A workpiece program is called up by a main program and

executed completely.
Example:
%
04711 program start
G59 XOZ210
G96 V200 T202 M4
•
•
•
M30 program end
%.

Note to%:
- In case of ISO code, in connection with external
progranming, there must be a i character at the
program start and at the program end.
- When reading in the program, e.g. by punched tape
or DNC, the% character causes opening and closing
of the data store.

1.26 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progrilllllling fundamentals

Sub-routines are program parts (e.g. recesses) that

can be called up in the main program. Such program
parts can be programmed separately as sub-routines
and called up at the relevant point in the main pro-
gram (see chapter· "Sub-routine technique").

Example: Main program with inserted sub-routine

Main program
%
04711 · main program sts,rt
G59 XDZ210
G96 V200 T02D2 M4
•
• Sub-routine (SR)
•G22 %
A8001 - - - - - - - - , 08001 sub-routine start
• GOO X.•.z...
• G01 X ...
• •
• •
• •
•
M3D main program end
M99
%
sub-routine end
%

By a. macro-call-up in the main program the relevant

sub-routine 9801 to 9899 is called up by 6201 ·to 6299.
Example: Main program wit~ inserted macro call-up

Main program:
%
04711 : ma in program start
• Sub-routine (SR)
•
•
G201 A ...B ...C..• , sub-routine start
•
•
•
•
•••
sub-routine end
•
•
•
M30 main _program end
%-

04.94 PRAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1.27

TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming fundamentals

B instructions
The B instructions are used to activate additiona1 functions
or attachments (options) and to 1oad them in the NC program.

B04 ... DN bar loading magazine

Workpiece 1ength B04 4000 - B04 4499
from O - 499 mm

B05 ... DN bar loading magazine

Repeat feed length B05 5000 - B05 5499
in case of mu1tip1e feeding
from O - 499 mm
Parting-off position B05 5500 - B05 5899
from O - 399 mm
Remnant optimization B05 5900 - B05 5999
from O - 99 mm

Caution:
- During machining of the bar (feeding to stop) MS - SPINDLE
STOP - must not be operative ( ->in case of M11 - CHUCK/
COLLET OPEN - there is no contro1l~r re1ease to the main
drive) because otherwise the bar wi11 not be advanced and
the B values will not be calculated. If a spindle stop is
required for advancing the bar, it can be obtained by
programming S1 = 0.
- The above information must not be taken into account in case
of automatic bar change.

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _"""'!"'_.- PRAL04.94
. 1.28
lX 8F 1NC 30/42-65
 Progranming fundamentals
fiRAUifl
r!iflllt:1111t11a1imtlRBY.«al~~fil~~1,1111111R!liUfX~i:iillij
M instructions

Main Tool Special

spindle carrier Wl attachments Range of application
Progranming technique
MOO Programmed stop
MDI Optional stop (with
key MDI pressed)
M30 End of program with skip back
M3I Skip block function OFF
M35 Tapered thread run-out ON
M36 M35 function OFF
M48 Override for feed rate
and speed operative
M49 M48 function OFF
M99 End of sub-routine

Spindle
M03 Main spindle clockwise
M04 Main spindle counter-clockwise
M05 Spindle STOP
MI7 C axis ON
MI7 MI27 C axis selection
without reference point
Ml8 C axis OFF
Ml9 Holding brake CLOSE
M70 Holding brake OPEN
M40 Gearbox speed 1 (depending on option)
M41 Gearbox speed 2 (depending on option)

Driven tools
M303 (M23) Rot. drive clockwise
M304 (M24) Rot. drive counter-clockwise
M305 (M25) Rot. drive OFF

Work-holding equipment
MIO Clamp workpiece
Mll Release (unclamp) workpiece
M77 Close chuck with spindle rotating
M78 M77 function OFF

04.94PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1.29
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progrilllliling fundamentals

Main Tool Special

spindle carrier Wl attachments Range of application
Bar machining
M60 Bar change
M61 Bar change w. profiled material
M131 Skip b1ocks OFF
for ON bar feed

Tool carriers
M07 Coolant (high-press.) ON
MOS Coolant ON
M09 Coolant OFF
M50 Rinsing device ON (TND 400)
(rinsing dev. + !HS: see !HS)

Tail stock
M28 Quill forward
M29 Quill back

Steady rest
M80 Close steady rest
M81 Open steady rest

Thread rolling head

M64 Rolling head - right
M65 Rolling head - left

Chip conveyor
M92 Chip conveyor ON
M93 Chip conveyor OFF

Replacement tools
M06 Replacement tool follows
M13 Last replacement tool

Workpiece sorter
M94 Attachm.swinging in to spindle centre
M95 Attachm.swinging out and moving down
M96 Attachm.moving down and swinging out

PRAL04.94
1.30
· TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming fundamentals

Main Tool Special

spindle carrier Wl attachments Range of application
Customer module
M86
M88
Ml2
M34
M47

Rinsing device through spacer

panel at main spindle side
M606 Rinsing device ON
M607 Rinsing device OFF

04.94 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1.31
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 ProgriilllJJing fundamentals

By means of the M instructions the various functions and collllliinds

are activated or deactivated on the CNC turning centre or on the
control.

Notes to the instructions.MOO to M609:

- An M instruction can be formed as an independent program block
or -occur together with G and/or T instructions.
- Up to three M instructions can be programmed in one program
block. They are always carried out together with the pro-
grammed block.
- MOO or MOl interrupts the program (example: machining of the
second side/face or for quality control).
- M30 indicates the end of a main program. The control recognizes
the last program block and jumps back to the program start.
Example:
04711 Program number
659
0
XO . Z••• Program start
0

MOO Progranmed stop

0

M30 Program end

with return to program start

- M99 indicates the end of a sub-routine. The control recognizes the

last block in the sub-routine and jumps back to the main program.

Caution:
- The following M instructions must be written as separate program
blocks: MOQ - MOl - f'.13~~- M!!~-- MlO - Mll - _Ml7 - M18
~? well ~s their sub-system dependent extensions-(options).

- The following M instructions contain M05 and M09:

MOO - MOl - M30 (except for automatic operation).
- M05 must be programmed before Ml7 or must already be operative
(see C axis). ·

1.32
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming fundamentals

Determining the direction of rotation

The directions of rotation
- of the main spindle MD3 clockwise
MD4 counter-clockwise
and
- of the driven tools M303 clockwise
M304 counter-clockwise
are always determined viewed from the drive .

viewed from viewed from

main spindle drive tool drive

Fig.: Main spindle, counter-clockwise rotation M04

Drilling tool, clockwise rotation M303

In case of toolholders with transmission ratio

pay attention to direction of rotation!

04.94PRAL 1.33
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 EDITOR

EDITOR

06.92 PRAL 2.1

TX SF
 EDITOR

2.2 PRAL 06.92

TX 8F
 EDITOR

Contents Chapter.Page

Prograrrming interface
CRT (screen) 2.5
Traverse keys 7
NC control panel 8
Switching on the control for program input 8

Data file and EDIT functions

Creating a new program 2.9
Entering a new program 10
Modifying a program block 11
Deleting a program block 12
Switching to another dialogue level 13
Deleting several blocks 15
Copying 16
Search run 18
Replacing 19
Block numbering 20
PaginQ 21
Call-up function 22

06.92 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2.3
TX 8F
 EDITOR

2.4 PRAL 06.92

TX SF
EDITOR
Progranming interface -

Progranming interface

CRT (screen)
CRT layout for programming

·tnformation area.: Input wi t1dow ·

itI~,~g-~ _ '-~-~L.A.v. __A.~~------------ :'s::::Imrn:r:nt:'::::1:1tr:;:;1mtt1lmr1im:::::::wit'I:':':BI!

0_ [I][
~ SOFTKEY BAR - ,,· W--J-~1 - ~

_Funct_i.on line
All available dialogue branches of a CRT (screen) mode are
displayed in the function line; the EDIT CRT mode, e.g.
consists of the functions
file - programming - working plan.
The currently active function is highlighted in light blue.

Status line
The status line indicated which dialogue branch and-what
dialogue depth are active, i.e. how many and which sub-
functions have been selected by means of the softkeys.

06.92 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2.5
TX8F
 EDITOR
Progranming interface

Infonnation area
The programs or the inputs currently being made are dis-
played in the information area: If no dialogue window
has been opened, the information area covers the entire
width of the screen.

Input window (dialogue window)

Progranming is supported by
- input areas which demand specific inputs from the
operator by means of clear language messages or com-
mand (instruction) addresses;
- pictograms for the selection of.input areas (G com-
mand addresses).

Error area
An error message is displayed in red in this part of
the CRT (screen) as soon as the control registers an
error or a fault. For details of the NC and PIC error
descriptions refer to the annex to these programming
instructions.

Softkey bar
In the softkey bar, the currently applicable assign-
ments of the softkeys HO to H7 are displayed in
clear language. The currently active softkey is high-
lighted in light blue.

2.6 PRAL 06.92

TX SF
 EDITOR
Progranming interface

Traverse keys
Key assignments Arrow keys:
Menu bar in
function area

right

left
Mark cursor position
in information area/
input window and/or
select block
Blue cursor
right

left

up

down

softkeys

06.92 PRAL 2.7

TXSF
 . EDITOR .
Progranming interface

NC-control panel
Regardless of the currently active softkey assign-
ments, th., :followirg three functions can always be
used-on the NC control panel.

Deleting an
input area :::::::: ~,: :::-:: :::::: -· t-··· ·--·-· ··: -~----
1~~=l r:~:: r~H J-!r:±:=WJ r. }~ r~=~~ f°r.:J~ ··: := ~

E] Deleting a
character

Cancelling the
1ast input ( not
applicable in
al1 functions)
Switching on the control for program input
1. Starting the machine*
1.1 Switch the machine on.by means
NCI! of the main switch.
ml 1.2 Activate the NC on the machine control
panel.
1ml 1.3 Switch the drives off.
l.4 Switch the drives on again.
Open and close the sliding guard.
2. Activating the program memory
oe1
2.1 Set the key switch to OPEN MEMORY.
0 EDIT
2.2 Activate the EDIT mode on the NC
control panel.

~
* cf. chapter 10: Setting-up, page 10.7

2.8 PRAL 06.92

TX BF
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

•
!!lilfalt-lil1ll Bl~fll~l~l111111811~1111Mtl1111illJll~lt~itM
Data file and edit functions
Creating a new program.,
The basic display appears on the CRT (screen)
after t~e '~f ke_y has been pressed:
·@/ .

f°Ffle .Progr.anmiDg . Working Plan If a program has already

~l"T"rC';,.,. TRAUB Fonnat oeen processed in the
P~111:,,••,. 3/ "'
editor~ -ft will be dis-
. ) 2"7'<1/ 3:2000 played on the CRT as the
O: 5 Ch: 63
current one;· nre F2i
o: 9815 Ch: 5 key must then be '.@I
pressed a second time
to switch to the initial
basic image .
.. ..

__ ,;

,~~~L:-: \o'.;1.;te Icopy IR~~a[Qe -rs~~~-~h b~rt

. IPa . e~
aciive

By pressing the softkey Hl (new program);

a window is opened on the CRT (screen) where
the program number (mandatory) as well as the
·date and definition (optional) can be entered.-
fne.. P.:ronr:::imm.:-.... -~w...... r,..: .... p1 ...... '

,::nrr/F;le/New M..mber
Pro9r,m1 .,. .
3/
TRAUB Format

Chatakter(Ch) ~ 7!.0/ 32000

0: 5 Ch: 63
0: 9815 Ch: 5
New Program

Open input jH1j

P.rogram Number:~ B15 w.indow
Name: ABC '
!late: 29.09.89
Qescri pti..on: Training eart
Qrawing ~umber:_. 123456

~
Store data • Ito-I
ROY
· B'lock_ I ;DH .. liystem l C~ll I I Fonna1 !Return f.ag~ •
L

..After all data Have been entered in the window

and the :jro-! key has been pressed, automatic
switching tci the 'Programming' menu takes place.
A new program input image appears on the CRT
(see overleaf).
06.92 PRAL
2.9
TXBF
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions
•

Entering a new program

The input number #000 is high1ighted in b1ue.
The program end(%) is disp1ayed in the fo11owing
1ine. The% character cannot be deleted and after
% no further input is possible.

File _pr'?9r_~p,m_i og Working.Plan

EOITr.Programmi ng _ TRAUB Format
Program Number 0: ..5
System: System:
#000
010 %

ADY
010Ck
I~':''' 0 L ~Ys1:_em I"",r I I-
re_turn Ir•i'9 ~'

All instructions to be entered are added to the

input number #000 (see below).

File
" ----··- .. -
Proar;ammj ...... Workinn.1Plan
EDIT/. Pr~grammi ng._ TRAUB Format
Progra~ Number 9: ..
5
System: System:
#000
010 G59 XO 2300;
020 G97 S1 ~1000 T101 M4;
030 GO X50 20;
040 G1 Z-20 F0.2; .
050 G25;
060 M30;
070 %

ROY
Blo·ck
""" . . / ~ist,em I Cal 1
.

I ,- r~tllrn I ~•9!'

PRAL 06.92.
2.10
TX SF
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions
-
r•~Jlll~~~~fJir~Yif~iji_~~~~~~li~~l~;~11•11~~~~~~K~
AG function can be entered directly via the keyboard.
An input window appears on the CRT (screen). The pictogram
and possible input addresses of the selected function are
displayed in this window.

File __ ?;:ogr.ammjng.. Warking..:Plan

EDIT/IPr9gr,1llJIJijngf.,(:y9le.s/.Rou9.h_ing TRAUB Format Example:
~P~r~os~r.~.•-m~
.. N~u~m~be~r.:....:::0~,.::..:....---=-5'-'----"-~=-------------------1 Roughing cycle
System: G71
#000 ~ngit. roughing cycle
010 G59 XO 2300;
020 G97 S1=1000 T101 M4;
030 GO X50 ZO; •,
040 G1
050 G26;
2·20 F0.2:
••• n Activate G71:

~.
060 M30; •,
•I
0?9 %
••
''
0 [!] GJ
• Sl

ROY Insert after 11°~-·I

the blue
. a,, System Call Fomw
Return ie'
c ive input number.

After all necessary addresses have been assigned

and the Ito-I_ key has been pressed, this block
will be inserted after the input number highlighted
in blue.

Modifying a program block

If a program block is to be modified (same Select;
G function), use the arrow keys at the edge display;
of the screen to position the blue cursor
on the block to be altered. After pressing if necessary,
the:lro j _key, the block appears on the CRT.
Before making a new input, an address that
has already been assigned must be deleted
by pressing the ,!"'."l_or l"ml
~_key (on the
delete an
existing
address; • /E
control panel. After·all addresses have
been modified, the program block is stored
or overwritten by pressing the Jro I_ key. store
modification.

06.92 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2.11
TXBF
 EDITOR_
Data file and edit functions

Deleting a program block

If a block has to be deleted, press the arrow keys
to position the blue bar on the block to be deleted.
Press t he t"''
. key on thP NC control panel. The
selected jine and' block No. is displayed once ·aga,in and
will only be deleted definitely by pressing the
key. ·
Jto-!
If by mistake a wrong program block has been se-
lected,• this procedure can be cancelled by pressing
the softkey H6 (return) or the E) key on the
NC control panel, but only if the selection of the
block to be deleted has not yet been confirmed by
·pressing the INPUT key.

File. Prcmr.arnming Wo-rki Plan

EDIT/fProgramriti ng _ TRAUB Format
·Program Number O: 5
Select with System: Syste~:
blue cursor;_ #000
010 G59 XO 2300;
020 G97 S1 =1000 T101 M4;
030 GO XSO 20
040 G1 Z-20 F0.2;
IC[L[l block ready Oscf~ G1
666...,, %
xss;
for deletipn;

no:;::--i de l ete
ADY
~ finally; ./
Sy'Stem .ca 11

~/E saving only

possible
.before INPUT

'

2.12 PRAL 06.92

TX.SF
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

Switching to another dialogue level

The functions listed below
- Delete
- Copy
- Search
-·Replace
- ff-count
belong to the· block functions which provide assistance
during programming. These functions are located one
level below the basic setting 'Programming'.
By pressing softkey HO (block operation), new func-
tions are assigned to the softkey bar and the above
functions are ready for program editing.

File . Pi"(;-g~ainmi ·~Q -Working-:Plan Chan_ging dialog ue level

EOIT/f Progranuni ng TRAUB Fonnat :;,
1Progr.am Number 0: 5 H
System:
Block
#000
010 G59 XO 2300; operation
020 G97 S1=1000 T101 M4i
030 GO X50 20;
040 G1 Z-20 F0.2;
050 G26;
060 M30;
070 % File. ~rOGl'amITii n.9. Working;Plan
EDITftPrograrrminglBlock Operation TRAUB Format
iPro9ram Number 0: 5
System:
;11000
ADY 010 G59 XO 2300;
'20 G97 S1=1000 T101 M4;
u, ocl<:r;:;J c.u 1 ,
I :. l30 GO X50 20;
G1 Z-20 F0.2; -
G26;
~ M30;
070 %

-·

'lDY

Delete ic~py 5~a~ch

- -, IiN=.c.ount
I Replace .. · r-011
ls~t:tch n~t~r,n ! raie
I Ac ive

06.92 PRAL 2.13

TX8F
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

PRAL 06.92
2.14 TX'.8F
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

Deleting several blocks

If several blocks have to be deleted, first of all softkey HO
(block• operation) must be pressed. This assigns new functions
to the softkey bar.
Then position the blue cursor bar on the first block to be
deleted and mark it by pressing the C±l-key. Press the arrow
key to move the cursor to the last block to be deleted (max.
one screen page) and also mark it. After the last block has
been selected, the complete set of blocks to be deleted will
be highlighted in light blue.
Press softkey HO : the program number and the number of
marked blocks will be displayed.
The marked blocks will be deleted by pressing the lro-i. key.

File ;--,fi;.ograinmiri.Sf Working Plan Initial image:

EDIT/Progr~mming/Block·Operation/Delete
. re-assign block·
TRAUB Format
operation on ~
Program Number 0: 5 softkey bar;
System: System:
#000
010 G59 XO 2300; Delete select first
0~i! G97 S1 =1000 T101 M4; ·and last blocks
030:, GO X50 20 with blue
~!
06tf"
~~
%
~ F0.2;
System$:
Line number: 020
cursor;
Block Number: 4 mark first and r--+l_
·1ast blocks in L..Il
block group.
Display:
ROY 1st line number
"";..,_._._.. ~-·. .. and number of
age
.. e 1<;tte,.' Copy earch etur:n I Active '111a rked blocks
(max. 14).
If by mistake wrong program blocks have Delete
been selected for deletion, this proce- finally;
dure can be cancelled by pressing soft-
key H6 (return), but only if the saving only
INPUT key has not yet been pressed to possible
confirm selection of the blocks to be before INPUT
deleted.

06.92 PRAL 2.15

TX8F
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

Copying
By means of Hl (copy) parts of the current program
or of other stored programs can be copied and inserted.
Before calling up the copy function, the place after
which the new program section is to be inserted in the
current program, must be selected using the blue cursor.
Only then press the softkey Hl (copy). A window opens
on the CRT (screen) in which the program number of the
program to be copied must be entered.
After input and pressing of the· lro-1-key, the program
will be placed in a buffer store and displayed in the
window. If no program number is specified, the current
program number will be displayed.
Select the program section to be copied by means of the
arrow keys at the edge of the CRT. (screen); proceed as
follows:
- Position the blue cursor on the starting line number
and mark it by pressing the·~-key.
- Use the arrow keys to move to the end line number r.-i
(max. l screen page) and also mark it by pressing L:CI.
These blocks will be highlighted in light blue.
By pressing the Ito-!_ key, the program section to be
copied will be inserted in the current program at the
position the cursor was located before calling up the
copy function.
If by-mistake the wrong program blocks have been se-
lected, this procedure can be cancelled by pressing
the softkey H6 (return), but only if the INPUT
key has not yet been pressed to confirm selection of
the blocks to be copied.

2.16 PRAL 06.92

TX 8F
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions
lfRAUitJ

File_. __ Proarammina Work Plan

Open input
win"dow;
!H1!
EDITJr PrograJTUTii ng/81 ock 0pe_ral,ion/Copy TRAUB Format
enter program
Program Number 0: 5
Prog'ram N_umber 0:
number of pro-
56
System:
System$: . 01
gram to be
·#000 copied;
010 G59 XD Z300;
020 G96 V220 T303 M4 MS; 010 (;59 ,.,,
=w;
030
G1
GO X22· Z1
Z-10;
020 N1 _T101;
030· G96 V250; load program [1°£>-I
15
jg:
G1
G1
G1
X28 Rl.5;
Z-20;
X35 FI0.5;
&W;i]
~~
G88;
GO XS5 Z2;
G71 P50 060 10.5 Koi
on the CRT;

G1
'090 G1
Z-00;
X42 Rl.5; ~i~
ow:
D4 F0..3 E0.1;
mark start/end ~
N50 G4S;
line of pro-
100 G1
110 G1
120 G1
Z-40;
X48
Z-50;
RJ.5; ti G74;
GB8; gram section
L_Tl

,1m1ll11%
100 GO X15 22; to be copied;
ROY~ 110 G1 zo F0.2;
120 G1 X32 D .3;
insert program~
belete ~,£!',~Y'- Search . I Sc~2!
jReplacelN-count Sw1 hI \ R~tu~f:>a~91?
; ..
section from l.l...Q=J
1

window into ·
current pro-
gram.

Cancel marked
program sec-
tion before
pressing
INPUT key!

06.92 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2.17
TX8F
ITRAUtJ EDITOR
Data file and edit functions
~ur..-u•e~1~etttll1~~~1~11'~1\~llfli•~~
Search mode
By pressing softkey H2 (search), a window opens
on the CRT (screen) where the block or term to be
searched can be entered. If the JF(>-J_key is pressed
after entering the term, the search will be started
and, if the block exists, it will be displayed in
the top line of the screen.

Fi le -Progra"IIlmi ng-:- _·;;:_1/Jo:;r_:k:...:,_~1:.:•:::nc__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--l

EDIT/lf?r~grammi.lJ.9.(Bl ock__ Operation/Search TRAUB Format
Open input Program Number 0: 5
window; System: System$:
#000 Search
010 G59. XO 2300:
020 G97 51 =1000 T101 M4;
030 GO X50 20
confirm 040 G1 Z-20 F0.2;
inpu1;. 050 G1 X65; System$: 1
. 060 %
Text for Search ~

Program NumP,er:

ADY
bele~e /Copy l~r9i:C:!i~eplace I.N•countTs~r~~ [Retu~n 1~g~%'ve

PRAL.•06.92
2.18 TX SF
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

Replace

In the current program, texts (max. one screen page) can be

modified by means of function H3 (replace).
Example: A geometry with transition chamfers D: 0.3 mm
has been defined. These transition chamfers are
now to _be modified to transition radii R: 0.5 mm.

File Programming Working Plan

EDIT: Programmi ng{Bl ock Oper~~i on/Rep 1 ace · TRAUB Format
Program Number- 0: 5 System:
System:
#000
010 G59 XO 2300;
020 G96 V220 T303 M4 MB;
030 GO X22 21;
040 G1 2-10;
System$ ·: 1
050 G1 X2B D0.3;
080 GI. Z-20i Old Text : D0.3
070 G1 X35 D0.3; New Text : R0.5
080 G1 .Z-30; Line Number : 0
090
100
G1
G1
X42 00.3;
2-40;
Block Number : 4--...._ - Starting line number
110 G1 X48 D0.3;
r--, Number of blocks to
120 G1 2-50; be modified
130 %
ROY

Delete i Copy - 'f'ai~.

~ Search IReplaCe·IN.:":count ~~r~i~ 1I ~~turn :Ac 1ve

Press the appropriate arrow keys at the edge of

the CRT (screen) to display on the screen the
program section to be modified.
When pressing the H3 softkey (replace), an
input window opens where the old and new texts, Open
the starting line number and the number of blocks input window;
tp be modified can be entered.
Press the Ito-!. key to store the modified blocks. store modi-
fied blocks.
If by mistake wrong program blocks have been
selected, this procedure can be cancelled by
Ple::ing the softkey H6 (return) or the
""' _ key on the NC control panel , but only
if e INPUT key has not yet been pressed to ·
confirm-the modification.
Cance 1 mo-
dificationlHsl
before pressi g
the INPUT key!
0
E "'-"

06.92 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2.19
TXBF
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

Block numbering
After pressing softkey H4 (N-count), new block
numbering can be defined in the input window.
Example: If 'Step= 5' is entered at the start of
the program, N00005 is specified as block number
when entering the block. The second block is then
NOOOlO, the third one is N00015, etc.

File•--BroorammiJl~ Work Plan:

EDIT[ Programming/Block.Operotion/N•count TRAUB Format
Program Number O: 5
System: System$:
#000 N-count
010 G59 XO 2300;
020 G97 S1=1000· T101 M4·•
030 GO X50 2D
040 Gl Z-20 F0.2;
050 Gl. X55;
060 % Istep·=- 5

ADY

Delete ! Co~~ I Se~r1h IRep·i~ce!.N-c~t:~s~~~~ \Retucn 'P~ie•

i Ac ive

If block numbering (N-count function) is activated

only later in the program after block numbers have
already be defined, counting will then continue in
the modified mode, e.g.:
G26 M9
Nll (recessing)
G97 Tllll Sl = 1000 M3
N-count 'Step = 5' : ·from here, this applies to a11
further block numbers:
N16
N21
N26

2.20 PRAL 06.92

TX SF
 EDITOR
}:>?ta file and edit functions fiRAUifl
Paging
When pressing the softkey H7 , the screen is scrolled
page by page by means of the four arrow keys at its edge,
and no longer line by line.
The 'page active' function can be cancelled by pressing
the H7 key again. This is recognizable by the fact
that the text on the softkey bar is no longer highlighted
in light blue.
File Pro9ra~in?: · Working ~lan
---"'"-' - . -
n
EOITf.'Programmi ng~Block .Oper.ati on LJ
TRAUB Format
Program Number 0: 5
System:
#000
010 G59 XO 2300;
020 G97 S1 =1000 T101 M4; -
030 GO X50 20
040 G1 Z-20 F0.2;
050 G1 XSS;
060 %

ADY
System$:

De 1ete I Co.py · I Search

· - 1ace,I t:J:-count I~era
.I Rep 11 1 'l:'•ie ':fL>
c... .; •-i.. ; RetJJ.rn rA.c.i 1 "le;.'!:i'--;

The paging function can also be activated in other dia-

logue levels and in the subfunctions 'Copy', 'Search'
and 'Delete'.

06.92 PRAL 2.21

TXSF
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

Call-up function
To facilitate the definition of the finished part contour
by means of the G instructions, the softkey H3 (call-up)
of the initial image for program input activates a menu-
controlled user interface.
The appropriate G instruction for the contour is selected
by way of pictograms, i.e. the G function does not have to
be known from the very beginning.
Example: Programming a .longitudinal. roughing cycle

IH3l !Call
1
. - ·-I
up File ~_:~graml!li ng, WOrk Pl an !

selection EDIT/'Programmi ng TFI.AUB Format

window; Program Number 0: 5
System: System$:
I
#000 '
010 G59 XO 2300;
020 G97 SI =1000 T101 M4;
030 GO X50 zo
040 G1 Z-20 F0.2; I
X65;
t~;;~1
I
'·

'!
..•

RDY

1:,1,ock. J<DIT • 1
system lc~ii> I ' . I.
format ,R..eturn l~~ifve I'

First rough selection by means of the arrow keys

at the edge of the screen. In this example: Cycles .
.-------,---,-------------------,'
~ij_e' ·. Progr~·•=~~,~·n~,;;~•~·w~o~r~ki~n~aP~l~a="--------===-::--,--11
·activate EDIT/Programming·~ TRAUB Format I
,submenu. Program Number O: 5 ;
System: System $: I

#000 Program groups

~--~---,~~-/
010 G59 XO 2300; Geometry Zero slT
020
030 GO
040 G1
G97 S1 = 1000 T101 M4;
X50
Z-20 F0.2;
20 r-,.._
~
p
Tool ch Modal
G func.
i
050 ·., G1 X65;
°- % 1,,,yc1es Sub-call
060 1
System °'l___j'':
[SJ
!
G func.
I~1

__
__
p·.:cial
,,
Teach-ir MSTB
·-
-~
I

~ ·-
•- !

•-- !

ADY ~--~--~----11
--r.c--~--1'
UIOCK
•O~cn .O
,i:;,.vfl lsystem
I'
!I Call I Format l~eturn l~~2~~- i
PRAL 06.92
2.22 1
TX 8F

l
 EDITOR
Data file and edit function

Second selection (in the first submenu) by means

of the arrow keys at the edge of the screen.
In this example: Roughing cycles.

File Pr-o ra~s~.Wor-king~'Plan

----------------,! Activate \
EDITfi Programming/Cycles TRAUB Format
I
function;
Pro..9ram Number O: 5 I
System: System I
!
#000 Cycles
010 G59 XO 2300; Drillirg Oanferirg
020 G97 S1=1000 T101 M4;
030 '. GO
040 G1
fg§pj Gl
X50 20 .
Z-20 F0.2;
XSS:.
8-m. D
060 . % Milling Thread

~ CT .,

Ra.grlrg Hg
ADY
~ I I

age
,Format Return Active

Third selection (in the second subrrienu) by means

, of the arrow keys at the edge of the ·screen: ·.-,
required G•instruction.
In this case: G71. .
! activate ~--
Fne 1:frQgra.rrimjTig_~ W0tking P,lan G instruction
EDIT/' Progratiuni ng7Cycl es/Roughing TRAUB Format
Program Number 0:
System:
5
System .
#000 Roughing cycles
010 G59 XO 2300;
020 G97 S1=1000 T101 M4;
030 Go· X50 20
mo
'" = '"
~ ~ ~ ~'
;
040 G1 Z-20 F0.2;
'' :050.~ G1 X65;

-
060 %

.
d
Synchronization cutt.OFF G14
Synchronization cutt.ON G15
Descending contour OFF G89
ADY Descending contour ON G88

\ ~~ a'II-
] ~ ,m. 'SYstem
. I ·can+"·'!
·... " _..x,,
I Fomw
I ~e-~~,.." I ~~~rve

06.92 PRAL•·---------------------
TX SF 2.23
 EDITOR
Data file and edit functions

The fourth selection window containing the G instruction

with the appropriate addresses then appears. This is where
actual programming begins:
- In the input window next to the graphics, enter all
necessary addresses and store them bY pressing the
LF~=•i. key.
File Pro9rammihg Work Plan
EDIT/ll'rqgramrning/.i;y~-ou_g_h~i-ng_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _TRA_U_B_F_o_rm_a_t--l
After input of all
necessary addresses .Program Number 0: 5
System:
store G71;
11°0•-•I I
'
#000
010
020
G59 XO 2300;
G97 S1 = 1000 T101 M4;
Jck,.,.,.,uo U•1•
\nth .. 1ul Cut.-, h•1•1•, Cy•ch
030 GO X50 20
Q%1.., G1 Z-20 F0.2; •,
osom G1 X55; •
ooo'· %
!.. ',. ' •'• "
.•. •
11
----- -,---11lf ' ''
'h~-:1, '
t,
•'
'u
""
ADY

I Fc=at I Retl,!rn I' Active

cage

The new program block is inserted in the program

after the block highlighted in blue.

If by mistake the wrong pictogram has been se-

lected in the subroutines, this selection can
be cancelled by pressing the softkey H6 (re-
r.::J:
-~, or'E:Ji turn) or the UNDU key on the NC control panel.
eancel a marked
pictogram or·an It is also possible to undo an input within the
address input. individual G instructions, e.g. if an address
has been entered incorrectly.
However, this applies only if the input has not
yet been confirmed by pressing the INPUT key.

'
2.24 PRAL 06.92
TX SF
 Programming technique I

PRAL 04.94
TX SF - -3.1
[tRAUit] Programming technique I

04.94 PRAL
3.2
TX SF
 Progranming technique I

Contents

Technological instructions
G97 Spindle speed S 3.4
G96 Constant cutting speed V 3.6
G92 Speed limitation 3.7
G94/G95 Feed rate 3.8
Tool call-up T 3. 10
G98 - G99 Feed adjustment 3. 13
G24 - G27 Rapid traverse to tool changing point 3. 14
G28/G53 Special rapid traverses 3. 16
Abolute dimension input 3. 19
Incremental dimension input 3.20

Traversing instructions
Survey 3.22
GOO Straight line at rapid traverse 3.24
GOl Straight line at feed rate 3.27
G09 Straight line at feed rate with precision stop 3.29
Angle programming 3.30
GOl Geometry paths 3.32
G02/G03 Circular arc 3.34
G02/G03 Geometry paths 3.40
Geometry paths with transition elements (D/R) 3.44
Automatic determinatiori of a geometry path 3.49

Additional G instructions
G04 Dwell period 3.57
G20/G21 Selection of inch/mm programming 3.59
Skip block functions 3.60
G36 - G38 Opening the memory 3.62
GOS Approaching at feed rate for internal measurements 3.65
Tool nose radius compensation 3.66

04.94 PRAL.,._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3.3
TX 8F
 Progrannning technique· I

Technological instructions

697 - Spindle speed S

697 S••• / V•• X... B... T... M•••

TI ~struction
tool call-up
B instruction
optionally:
S.. spindle speed or V•. X.. cutting speed
and tool position

A fixed spindle speed (rpm) is entered directly

by means of 697 and the address letter S.

697 S••• B••• T ••• M...

T
sprndl e speed

spindle speed
800 rpm

-----------------
---.

N2 G97 S1 ::800 T0202

M3
GO XOZ2 MB
G1 2-.. F0.1
•
•

.·
04.94 PRAL
TX SF TNC .l'!O!!"Jl'!l"2""-""6'!!"5------------------• 3.4
 Prograllllling technique I

G97 v._ X.... E! •••T••• M...

T plsition of tool cutting edge(~)

or workpiece diameter
cutting speed
A fixed speed is entered indirectly by means of instruc-
tion 697 and the address letters V and X. Thelinput of
a cutting speed V (surface speed) and of a workpiece dia-
meter X causes the control to calculate automatically the
corresponding spindle speed using tlie formula
V= cutting speed (m/min)
=
X= workpiece diameter (mm)
and to keep this speed constant. - S= ·spindle speed (rpm)

Example for 697 V••• X•••

on _the main spindle

10mm
- \
••
-
LI
L
-
--
••
- - -
.
••
. • 7
- '

cutting speed V = 25 m/min

_,,

N2 G97 V25 X10

P03G9'2
T0202M3
GO XO 22 MS
G1 Z-... F0.1
•
•

3.5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PRAL04.94
TX 8F 1NC 30/42-65
Programning technique I

G96- Constant cutting speed V

G96 V... B...
TT. . . t.
M instruction
tool call-up
B instruction
cutting speed (m/min)
Tool life is increased when carrying out
V= cutting speed cutting operations at constant cutting
(m/min) speed. The cutting speed for a workpiece
X= workpiece diameter is obtained from the spindle speed and
{mm) the workpiece diameter on the section
S= spindle speed {rpm) being machined. Th~ relationship·is de-
rived from th~ following formula:

IV= x;~x I IV= o;~n I =

A constant cutting speed is obtained by con-

tinuously ada.pting the spindle speed to the
actual turning diameter. This spindle speed
regulation is carried out automatically·by
the control if the instruction 696 is pre-
programmed.
Note:
Example for 696 V••• : - 696 is not used for drilling, reaming,_
Cutting speed: tapping, thread chasing.
V = 250 m/min
Speed limitation:
max. 3000 rpm
~

.,,
- I
'
~
N6 G96 V250 T0606 M4
G92 53000 )
GOO x.. z.. J
•
.I
- - .
I
G01 2-... F0.1 n -
•
• - ~
I

04.94 PRAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.6

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning te~hnique I

G92 • ~peed limitation

G92 X. ..Z... S.•. 0 ...

e... _t
T
M instruction
B instruction
minimum spindle speed
maximum spindle speed
nq input

If the maximum spindle speed of the machine, due

to work-holding equipment, workpiece or bar stock,
cannot be used completely, a speed limitation must
be programmed by 692 S•••

3.7 PRAL04.94
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranuning technique I

694/695 - Feed rate

Feed "F"
By. the instruction 694 or 695 the feed rate for
the traverse movement is entered in mm/min and
mm/rev respectively.

Feed nun/min
694 s ... B... M...
-I- . -~-i-nstruction
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
Application:
If the main spindle is not rotating
(cross drilling, off-centre drilling, milling),
- C axis operation,
- P0LYF0RM milling

-,
Feed nun/rev
695 S... B...
-,-
M•••

M instruction
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
Application:
- When turning.
- The programmed feed is related to the
main spindle speed.
- The 695 instructions is the switching-on
condition.

04.94 PRAL 30/42-65

TX SF TNC ---------------------- 3.8
 Progranming technique I

Example for 694:

Feed 11lll/min = (spindle speed x feed)
NS T606 MS S3= 800M304
GOO Z-...
GOO x..: MB.
G94
G01 X... .EfID=>. feed
is equivalent to a
feed of 0.1 mm/rev
at a speed of 800 rpm

,.....
-~, I i '
.
I
_f i
I
I
I

~.
I
I
! I
-•
I
-- -
I
I

~·
• 7
...
- I

Example for 695:

Feed nm/rev

NB G96 V250 TB08 M4

GOO X•• Z •• MB
l 695 (only if G94 is
operative)
601 Z- ... F0.2 - feed rrm/rev
I
I
I

••
0.2 mm/rev

3.9 PRAL04.94
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 PrograD111ing technique I

Tool call-up (T ••• )

T
Ioffset
T
tool number
number

If the turret is in a position that permits indexing,

it can be indexed by a T call-up to the tool required
next.
The tool call-up includes both the tool setting dimen-
sions and the corrections (offsets).

(TOOL DATA) :rooL 2. I/ 3. Tool call-up

111:fnk.llA:Abs.
<X> <:D <O <HosrR> <P> (HC Pas.]
n 1 8.888
8.888
8.808
8.888
8.880
8.888
8.808
0.888
8
8
Xl
Zl
8.880
e.ooe - Call-up of the turret
2
3 8.880 8.800 8.888 0,808 0 Cl 8.008 station where the re-
4 SB.BBB 50.088 0.008 0.008 8 v: o.e1m
quired tool is located.
5 0.008 0.008 0.000 8.BBB 0 r• •-tJDiJ

8.080 0.008 8.008 B.800 0

6
7 0.888 0.808 8.800 0.808 8 - When calling up a tool,
0 O.BBB 0.008 8.880
B.BBB
8.888
0.808
8
8. I the tool data X and Z
8.808 8.808
9
18 0.0BB 0.808 8.080 0.008 B from the tool data file
8.BBO 0.800 0.0BB 8.088 0
(see figure) are auto-
11
12 0.808 B.BBB 8.888 8.8BB 0 · mati ca lly taken into
13 B.BBB 0.808 fl.BBC ·e.eee 0 account in the next
14 B.OBB 0.BBB 8.088 0.BBB ·e
15 8.880 8.808 B.000 8.880 0 traverse block.
I( llX( lZ( JC( JR( lP( J

FetnKorr -Stcnd~t. G54-G57 Barriere Ho!!hUl!

CRT picture: T00L/PARAM ,;:,- Hl T data

3.10 , 04.94 PRAL

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Prog_rannning technique I

Tool tip offset

- In addition, a tool (TOOL OFFSET) TOOL I. I/ 2

offset can be called H:tnk.nA:flbs.
<X> , (D <C> <Nose-R> <X> <Z> <C> <Hose-R>
up with the address T. ! I 8.008 0.000 0.000 0.080 16 8.800 B.B0B 8.BB0 8.008
2 0.0BB 0.808 0.808. 8.808 17 0.888 8.808 8.888 8.888
- Forty tool offset ( cor- 3
4
B.800
8.000
0.808
0.000
0.000
0.080
0.088
B.080
18
19
0.000
0.080
0.800
0.008
0;000
0.088
0.000
0.080
rection) pairs are s 0.000 0.080 B.088 B.8BB 20 0.800 0.080 B.808 8.BB0
ava_ilable. 6 8.888 B.BB0 B.BBB B.800 21 8.000 8.080 8.080 8.080
7 8.808 8.000 8.808 B.800 22 8.080 0.808 B.BB8 8.000
- Severa 1 offset numbers e 8.808 8.808 8.BBB B.800 23 B.B0B 0.888 0.800 B.888
can be assigned to 9 8.800 0.008 8.888 0.800 24 -8.008 0.000 8.800 8.080
10 0.000 0.000 0.008 0.008 25 0.000 0.008 0.080 0.800
each tool.
II 8.000 0.000 0.000 0.008 26 8.000 0.000 8.00B 8.080
- To avoid confusion, 12 B.008 0.000 0.808 0.000 27 0.088 8.008 8.08B 0.008
13 0.808 8.000 e.oea B.88B 28 0.8B8 8.0B8 0.00B 0.000
tool number and offset 14 e.aaa 0.800 0.000 0.008 29 0.88B 8.080 0.888 e.eea
IS 0.888 0.000 0.008 0.088 30 0.880 0.000 8.080 8.000
number should corre-
spond, e.g. T0202. !( IH )( l( )(

- The tool tip offset is

absolute or incremental.
A = absolute Standzt. 654-657 Barriere Nenue

I = incremental

CRT picture: TOOL/PARAM=l> HO tip off

04.94 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3.11
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programming technique I

.Example: Tool call-up T

N2 T02 02
-, I
offset number 2
storage location #2 (Fig. b)
tool number 2
storage location #2 (Fig. a)
block number
The numerals 01 to 40 are available for turret stations.
The numbers 01 to .20 always refer to the first cutting edge,
the numbers 21 to 40 always to the second cutting edge. Thus,
each turret station can be called up by two numbers so that
also tools with two cutting edges, e.g. recessing tools, can
be used.

Example: Tool call-up T7

first second
cutting edge cutting edge

-~ /

------
T0707 T2727
P03TA01

Tool call-up in the NC program

- A tool should be called up together with the function
G96 or G97.
- As a rule, a T instruction should be' preceded by a
block number so that re-entering into the program can
take place during machining, e.g. after tool breakage,
etc.
To avoid confusion, it is recommended to use the same
numbers for block number and tool call-up number.

Example: Tool call-up T2

N2 G96 V200 T0202 M4

r cutting speed
block number
-,
direction of rotation

3.12 04.94 PRAL

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
·PrograDJJJing technique I
·.

G98 - G99 Feed adjustment

Feed adjustment ON Feed adjustment OFF

r t
698 S... B... M... 699

M-Cstruction M instruction
B· instruction B instruction
spindle speed or spindle speed or
cutting speed cutting speed

Application:
The feed rate entered in the program with Fin mm/rev
refers to the main spindle speed. If a centre hole is
produced in combination of main spindle speed 51 and
rotating tool 53, a feed rate adjustment must be pro-
grammed related to the relative rotational speed.
By programming 698 5 .•• , the control takes into con-
sideration both rotational speeds.
Example: 1000 U/rnin 500 U/rnin

'••
••
.
••
:

-·-· · feed rate ·0.1 =frev

.•

N2 697 S1 =1000 T0202 M03

M3D3 S3=5DD----- feed adjustment ON
G98 $500
GO XOZ2 MB
61 z.... F 0 . 1 - - - - - feed rate 0.1 rrzn/rev at
iOOO + 500 rpm (S1 + S~)
GO Z2
699 - - - - - - - - - feed adjustment -OFF

•
••
04.94 PRAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3.13
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
LTRAUIJ Programning technique I

G24 - G27 Rapid traverse to tool changing point

G24
-G27 rs... re... t When changing tools, the
tool must be traversed
in the working area to a
position where the turret
M instruction can be indexed without
S- instruction collision. This point is
called the tool changing
spindle speed point. For the approach
or cutting speed of the tool changing
point, four instructions
are available. No coordi-
nate input is required.
It depends on the posi-
tion of the tool nose on
the workpiece contour
which of the instruc-
tions G24 - G27 is se-
Jected.

tool changing point

With 624 the tool moves in X di- G24
rection to the level of -------EB
the tool changing point. •I
I
With 625 the tool moves in Z di-
rection under the tool
changing point. tool changing point
G24 or G25
G25 can be progranmed if in- E9
dexing on this target '''
''
point can be carried.out
without collision. -------• :
With 626
or 627 the tool changing point
is reached in both co-
G26
r-----
I
I
tool changi~g point

• E9
ordinates. I
G26 has the same effect as
first G24 and then G25. tool chaQging point
has the same effect as G27
G27 ©
first G25 and then G24.

--------~ •
PRAL04.94
....
3.14
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 '-"' ..-

Programning technique I

tool changing point

X

At Tapid traverse to
tool changing point P03G261

...._ I

-·
• 1 X 0.000
2 X
~ X
• X
S ll
0.000
0.000
D.000
0.000
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C.DOD
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
DIC'"'-1
X1
ZI
Ct
\'I
T1
Cl.GOO
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

• X 0.000 Z 0.000
{TOOL CHANGING POINT)
7 ll2'11.00 Z 2DD.DO

ol • II II

.......
Appropriate picture in
TOOL/PARAM =) H7 menu :?) H4 Set-Up 2

Note:
- Before calling up 624 - 627 the tool
nose radius compensation must be off
( 640).
- G24 - G27 deactivates the tool data.
Therefore, there must be a T instruc-
tion before further machining, even
with the same tool.

04.94PRAL 3.15
1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
HRAUC, Programning technique I

G28, G53- Special rapid traverses

G2S Rapid traverse to__ reference point

G28 =-==....,_,,... S...B...M .. ."

ITTnstruction
I
~ i~s~ruction
spindle speed (rev/min).
coordinates of auxiliary
point in absolute or
incremental dimension

l
direct rapid traverse
without auxiliary point

-~~-
coordi n·ates
x ,.. :rererence
-..--.:::7 po1nt

.---
start point
---- .
-·· .

By the 628 instruction

the turret is moved di-
rectly at rapid traverse
to the reference point.
By additional input of
z X and Z the selected tool
(tool nose) travels onto
the prograrraned auxiliary
point_ Only then, on the
rapid traverse ·X way to the reference
over auxiliary point point, are the tool data
deactivated_

...
start poin,·
ut ! .........
: . ... ~
,,
1

e X j auxiliarY point

'~ w ~ 1' ._z_. . z

Note:
- Prior to calling up 628 the tool nose radius
compensation must be off (640).
- 628 deactivates the tool data. Therefore,
there must be a T instruction before the
operation is continued, even ~ith the same
tool.

3.16 PRAL04.94
....
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

G53- Rapid traverse related to tool-carrier

refere~ce point and macpine zero point

G53

. ·r· j""J·:·nstruction
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
coordinates of
target point

.·
653, 1i ke GO, is a rapid target position
of tool reference
· traverse movement. But point
the programmed target
point X and the distance
Z are related to the ma- ·start position of
chine zero point and the too1 reference
tool reference point, point
respectively.
edge_p_a:••• •
machine
zero point
---------
Cutting
.

--------z--------
Note:
- Prior to calling up 653 the tool nose radius
compensation must-be off (640).
- The prev·iously programmed workpiece zero point
remains valid.
- To continue machining a T instruction (tool
data) must be programmed in any case.

04.94 PRAL 3.17

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique I

PRAL04.94
3.18
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

. Tool moves at rapid start point

traverse TO position X+
X30 ZlO

------------1'~~-.....--..
I --·~
.target point
Z+ "-----_
----~~--... ·---
10
w
Tool moves at feed X+
rate TO position
X30 Z-15

•-•·,start point

I . Z+
15
w
Tool moves at feed
rate TO position X+
X60 Z-55
060

------1,
start point
030

___/ j
Z+
w
X+

X-

Dimension input in absolute always relates to

the workpiece zero point (W).
A traverse instruction always starts from the
point approached last and leads to the new
target point. The target point can be pro-
grammed with X and Z coordinates.
This method of programming is called absolute
04.94 PRAt _ _ _ _ _ _ _dimension
____ programming.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
TX SF TNC 30/42-65 3.19
 Programming technique I

Incremental dimension input· Inputs in incremental dimen-'

sion always relate to the
start point start point of the traverse
X+ 45 : (T •• -.call.:up) instruction. In the NC pro-
gram, the address letter U
is used instead of X, and
Winstead of Z.

I Z+
10
P03WG05

Caution: . Tool moves at feed rate

- The first traverse movement after BY the amount W-25
tool call-up (T ••• ) must always be
programmed in absolute dimension.

U+
X+

w-~-+--w+
I
15 10
U-

04.94 PRAL
3.20 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I [fRAUfJ

Tool moves at feed rate

BY the amount.UlSW-40 .. X+
30

15
start point,
, Z+
.
55 15 '
' /

P03WG07

Absolute and ·incremental dimensions

can also be used mixed, i.e. one co~
ordinate in absolute, the other in
i ncremertta l.

Tool moves at feed rate ,

TO position X60 · X+
060
Tool moves at feed rate
BY the amount W-40 I
I start ~oint
030
I
I ,~ Z+
55 15 ~ ';,/w -

04.94 PRAL 3!!'!0!"!/"!!142""-""6""5_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

TX SF TNC 3.21
 Programning-technique I

Traversing instructions
The contour of a workpiece con-
sists of the geometric elements
Survey line and arc.
Goo- Straight line at rl!pid traverse A line is programmed by means of
the traverse information 60 or
Go1-. Straight line at feed rate 61,- that of an arc by 62 or 63.
Go2-: Circular arc, clockwise With the line, 60 is used for
G03-. Circular arc, counter-clockwise rapid traverse and 61 for feed
rate.
Note: In case of circular arcs,.62 is
Leading zeros may be dropped used for circular m9ve$_ (c1ock-
(GO - Gl G2 G3, etc.). wiserand 63 for circular.moves
("counter-c 1ockwi se).

G1
r+----~.._ G3 , 'tool nose
.. G1 ~~, (cutter point)

, ·: · : \\ ·_.:x,I · ,. G2 G1 ,t'
..: -: .:·; -~~ ;>~t:;::J ·:'·_;', _',.\ ,: -----------
P03VA01

The motion of the tool nose is viewed.

•
3.22 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique I

tool nose•
(cutter point)

w Z+
15
25

50
75

P03VA02

The motion of the tool nose is viewed.

Program:
GO X20 Z2 MB
G1 Z-15 F0.2
G2 X40 Z-25 R10
G1 Z-40
G3 X60 z-so R10
G1 z.75

04.94PRAL 3.23
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

GOO- Straight line at rapid traverse

GOO

s.. r··· t
tool call-up
t,stroctio,s

B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
feed, only R axis
for tool nose radius
compensation OFF
coordinates of target point
in absolute or incremental dimension

start point
•r
,· By the 60 instruction the tool
tazt point , , , ' (tool nose} moves at rapid tra-
z ,,,,, :::, verse, i.e. at the fastest pos-
""', sible speed, to the target point.
The tool path is determined by
w the CNC control through linear
><
&
interpolation, i.e. the path
runs in a straight line (shortest
," distance 'start point - target
'V point'}.
The control monitors the maximum
X+ permissible rapid traverse rate
for each axis.
w
W- !W+
U-
Z- Z+
P03VA03
X-

3.24 PRAL04.94
TX 8F TNC 30/42·65
 ProgrilllJlling technique I

The target point of the

tool nose is programmed
by entering the addresses
X and Z. The addresses
I/A and Kare only re-
quired when deactivating
the tool nose radius com-
pensation (see chapter
"Tool nose radius compen-
sation").
·Feed Fis valid only for
machines with tailstock
axis R. The address T X+
(tool call-up) should not
be used during a GO move-
ment for indexing to an- 2 , , ~ - - t o o l nose pttze

other tool station, but t§>,

only for "switching" to
a (possibly) existing ,,,,"
second tool nose (e.g. on ~,,,,,,.,.,..,.,,4-..__ _ _ target point
a recessing tool).
The GO instruction auto-
matically causes a preci- w Z+
sion stop (G9). When pro-
gramming GO, the (possibly
previously) programmed
feed rate Fis maintained
and can be reactivated,
for example by means of
Gl.

GO X20 Z2 MB

coolant ON
coordinates of
target point

04.94PRAL. 3.25
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progrilllllling technique I

3.26 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progrilllllling technique I

G01 • Straight lin~ at feed rate

q=.-=;.c:.e·::.· F•• E •• S•• B •• T •• M ..

-J
By the 61 instruction, the
instruction
tool call-up
8 instruction
spindJe speed o.r
r
tool {tool nose) moves to the cutting speed
target point at feed rate. feed rate -
The feed rate is programmed transition elements
with F: in rm,/rev {see G95)
for a rotating main spindle; feed.rate
in rm,/min {see G94) for a transition chamfer
non-rotating main spindle. transition radius
The feed rate Fis modal
(self-retaining), i.e. once angle input
programmed, it remains active coordinates of target point
until a new Fis programmed. in absolute or incremental dimension
The motion runs in a straight
line (linear.interpolation).
It is possible to execute
axis-parallel and angular
motions (see examples).
By means of the addresses
X and Z, the target point of
the tool nose is programmed
in absolute dimension.
X
Programming of the target &
. point in incrementa 1 dimen-
sion is done with the ad-
dresses U and W.
z PDJG101

transition transition radius

chamfer · / ~

------1::-
''
/
,' ,'
/
,' .....
/ program:ne~
target po1nt
·of the first
~-~-fi~
------=:
prograrmned target

traver:se movement

' traverse movement

'''
'''
'
i,-..aD;.....;~

·· 04.94 PRAL 3.27

1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

Example: Straight line 61

G1 2·15 F0.2
T
. feed (mm/rev)

target point X+

w Z+

P03GtOJ

Axis-parallel movement

t.arge~ pojnt X+
G1 X40 z.25 F0.2

Program with GO:

GO X20 Z2
G1 Z-15 F0.2
G1 X40 Z-25

Feed 0.2 is modal

.. \?::t~: ·••. :; .. w Z+
.:/·;_.<{:~/r :~i~r~~!~: i~:,i:-----!
15

25

3.28 PRAL04.94
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique I

GOS- Straight line at feed rate

with precision stop
G09 XflJ.:z/W.. A.. D/R.. F•. E.. S.. B.. T.. M..
L same meaning as GOl

609 produces sharp corners.

With the 69 instruction it

is possible to approach a
target position so that the
feed rate is eventually re- G /.';harp-edged .
duced to zero {precision 1
stop). •------~
Only after the target point
is reached accurately by
the tool nose is the next G9
traverse block released.
The G9 instruction is used
in place of the Gl instruc-
tion when sharp corners
are to be produced (e.g.
tracing edges of hydraulic
--.----
Block sequence 69 - 61
F03G901

pistons).

~rounded

Block sequence Gl - Gl

-------
04.94 PRAL 3.29
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

Angle programming

x,z
ltarget point

-s
target point

target poil)t

target point,
defined in A-
X and Zand .a!!!!.,l!:2_ line= 0
by A

unknown
intersection point

S = start point
A+ = positive angle input
A- = negative angle input

Instructions for angle detennination

Measure angle A from the start point S!
From S draw a horizontal auxiliary line to the
right(= 0). From this auxiliary line measure
the angle counter-clockwise until you reach the
leg of the traversing travel!
This is the positive angle input.
The angle input must be made in decimal mode.
Convert the minutes and seconds into decimal
degrees! 30' = 0.5° 20' = 0.333°
04.94PRAL 3.30
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique I

Examples: Angle A

180° oo

270° P03G111

G1 Z-25 F0.2
G1 X20 A210 F0.1
G1 Z-65 F0.2

~
10
G1 X60 A135
.

65

P03G112

cutting tool moves

away from the spindle G1 X20 A·45 F0.1
G1 Z-42.32 F0.2
G1 X40 A30
G1 zo

-:::~· /.·c,.
a

25
42.32

F03G1tl

3.31 PRAL04.94
TXBF1NC 30/42-65
 Progriill'llling technique I

G01 • Geonietry paJ;hs

Angle A without target point coordinates x. Z
With the help of angle A
the geometry processor of
the TX BF control carries
out intersection point
calculations.
90° known
The machine does not work arget point X, Z
directly out of the pro-
gram store, but out of a ?
unknown
buffer store. This buffer intersection point
store always contains one
block in advance, i.e. 270°
before the machine exe- G1 A ..
cutes a movement, it al- 90° G1 X •• Z •• A ••
ready "knows" ·what the ,-er-.. A
next program block com-
prises.
180°

270° .

An unknown point must be followed

by a known point with x. Zand the
corresponding angle A.

In the above example the first program block

is 61 A•••
The buffer store already contains the next
block 61 X.~ Z.• A••• i.e. from the known
target point X, Z the unknown point can be
calculated (back) with the aid of angle A.
61 A••
61 X•• Z•• A••

04.94PRAL 3.32
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 ·ProgrilllJlling technique I

Examples: Geometry paths 61 ·

G1 A105
G1 X100 z.50 A.30

50 Z+
P03GHl6

GO X40 21 MS
G1 Z-25 F0.2
G1 X20 A210 F0.1
G1 A180 F0.2
G1 X60 Z-85 A-45

A210

I 0
~

"

25
w Z+
85
P03CU07

-PRAL04.94
TI< SF TNC 30/42-65 .
·-
fiRAU(I Programming technique I

G02/G03 - Circular arc

Go2- Circular arc, clockwise

G02 X ..Z/W.. I.. K.. D C.. --r-=r'- S.. B.. M ..

P.. Q•.
R..

rr,""'"""·
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
feed of
transition elements
·feed rate
intersection -point input
transition chamfer
transition radius
circle centre point input
(I/K=incremental, P/Q=absolute, ~=radius)
coordinates of target point ·
in absolute or incremental dimension

K-
i
,_
K+
-
z ''<X>G20>

P+
a
Q- O+

. P-
z

3.34 PRAL04.94
TX 8F 1NC 30/42-65
-
 ProgrilllJlling technique I

Gos-·•circular arc, counter-clockwise

I••,. I(.. t
r
H.. F.. E.. .. B..
P.. a..
R

M fost,,ctioo
· B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
feed of
transition elements
feed rate
intersection point input
transition chamfer
transition radius
circle centre point input
(I/K=incremental, P/Q=absolute, R=radius)
coordinates of target point
in absolute or incr·emental dimension

K- i K+
I-
z P03G301

P+

Q- O+

P-
z

04.94PRAL 3.35
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 ProgranJJling technique I

Examples: Circular a~ 62/63 .

clockwise 62

counter-clockwise 63
There are·three possibilities for the
input of the cir~ular arc:
Programming radius R (<180').
G2 X..Z..R ..
-
G3 X..Z..R ..

Programming the coor-dinates P and Q of the centre point,

with P and Q relating to the workpiece zero point.
G2 X..Z..P •• Q••
G3 X..Z..P •• Q••

Programming the coordin~tes I and K of the centre point,

with I and K relating to the start point of the circular arc.
G2 X..Z..I •• K..
G3 X..Z..1 •• K••

3.36 . ,..
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - · PRAL 04.94
1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

target point tar et oint

a:<180°
start poi n:t.~
int

........_. ________
G2X .. Z .. R ..
._ --J1-. _ _ _ _ _ _ _,._

G2 X .. Z •• P... Q ••

Note:
- If radius R is entered, there are two possibil-
ities to define the centre point (see Ml-M2).
- The control calculates Ml.
Therefore, radius prograuming R is only possible
when the angle cX. is smaller than 180°.
When OC.equals or is greater than 180°, the centre
point must be progrannned with P and Q or I and K.

transition
~~.
;' u , , . ) transition
chamfer ,'-, ,/'~_L,~_ radius
I ,, /I
!' i,. /Ri
'
'' '' '
___..:o:~

.
As in the case of Gl, it is possible with G2/G3
to program a transition chamfer Dor a transition
radius Cat the target point. Differing from Gl,
then the transition radius must be C because the
address R is already used for the radius of the
circular arc.
As in.the case of Gl, there is the feed F and the
(possibly reduced) feed E for transition elements.
Another address is the intersection point input H.
It is required when the start point or the target
point of the circular arc is unknown (see geometry
paths G2/G3).

04.94PRAL 3.37
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 ·Progrilllllling technique I

Example: Circular arc, clockwise - 62

. target
point X,.z star:t _point

X+
G1

G1

.
Sl
.
ii!

Z+
25

35

55

GO X30 Z1 MB
G1 Z-25 F0.2
G2 xso Z-35 R10
or G2 xso Z-35 PSO 0-25
or G2 xso Z-35 110 KO
G1 Z-55
Q-25

centre
point
M •-----1----.--
KO
-
start pciint

P and a
and K

3.38 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

·Example: Circular arc, counter-clockwise-~ G3

target
point X, Z sta.rt point

X+
Gl

1
RlO. lf• f,-..;G;.;- - 1

I
I
i ¢\o
I I
--------1---l-----{e!.r---•
I I

i I -4( 25 •: Z+
•
l:-----3s,-.---,1>• I
,.._ _ _ 55 I
•:
GO X30 Z1 MB
G1 Z-25 F0.2
G3 xso Z-35 R10
or G3 xso Z-35 P30 Q....35
or G3 X50 Z-35 10 K-10
G1 Z-55

I I
:• •----Q-35---)1,-:
I I
I I
----r I
I I
I I
I I
I I
l start }
MI 10 / .point .. I

-:t: -lo ¢to

--+---i-

P and. Q
and·K

04.94PRAL 3.39
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique I

G02/G03 - Geometry paths

Tangential transition
Line - circular arc

G1 A.. known ppint.X, 7_

T""
G2X z..i. tangential
permitted for transition
tangential transition
known point

---'--·-------fEI~
Gl-G2

Circular arc - line

known pgint X,. Z

t
G3
angle A -

- l
permitted only for ?· tangent1a
transition
tangent.ia l transition
G1 x.. z..A.. G3

1
known
point - - - - · - - -f€1.,-
·G3-Gl
As for geometry path Gl:
An unknown point must be followed by
a known point (in the following block).

Note:
- Within the geometry path 62/63, radius input R
must only be used in case of tangential transition.
- If the transition is not tangential, the circle
centre point coordinates P and Q must be programmed.

04.94PRAL 3.40
1X BF TNC 30/42--65
 Progranrning technique I

04.94 PRAL
3.41 TX BF
 Progriil!llling technique·!_

If the transition·is Non-tangential transition

not tangential,.the
line intersects the The intersection poi~t that lies
arc twice. Therefore closest to the known point (of the
it is necessary to 1ine) is HO..:
specify the position
of -the intersection
point HD or Hl. In ad- Line - circular arc
dition, the arc centre
point must be pro-
grammed by P and Q. x.z known poi rit . ·
G1 A1BO · of line
G2 X... Z... P... Q... HD

F03G115

G1 A1.80 knDffll point

G2 X... Z... P... Q... H1

P03Gt115
Circular arc - line
knatm point
G3 P... Q... HD ..cf line. ? HO ?
G1 X... Z... AD

G3 P... Q... H1 . known point ? ? H1

G1. X... Z ... AD

04.94 PRAL 3.42

TX BF 1NC 30/42-65
 Programming technique I

Special case:
The known point (of the line) lies within the arc. Even if
there is only one intersection point, it is necessary to
specify HO or Hl.

Example for HO:

G3 PO Q-28 HO
G1 X40 Z-10 AO

.Example for Hl:

----------
------- G3 PO Q-28 H1
G1 X40 Z-37 AO

Example: Non-tangential transition~ ~•

known point X, Z
_angle A-
---- ------, ,transition
not tangential

M
a
n.
•

G2-G1

04.94 PRAL
3.43 TX BF
 Progrilllllling technique I

Geometry paths with transition elements (D/R)

To break or round sharp
edges, a transition cham-
~' target point target point fer Dor a transition
Gl
---1,~~ I
I
,,
/ ~ , . of the first
,

,
traverse instr.
_.;.;..._r
Gl
of the first
traverse instr.
radius R can be added to
the end of Gl so that a
line Gl transits to the
next line 61 with a Cham-
I I

I~ R \ G;, fer or a radius. The size

of the transition element
is not limited.
----------- -------- If the chamfer length
(actual, measurable
length) is to be pro-
grammed, Dis written
with a·minus sign, e.g.
D-0.2.
, D without sign expresses
I. D the chamfer width relat-
/~- I

---..... . ' ::---;'\ /

,'
I ed to the Z axis.
With small chamfers
angle , I
I {e.g. only 0.2 mm), the
bisector • I
I
programmed (modal) feed F
,
I
I
. may be too great. There-
fore, it is possible to
program the feed during
G1 X .. Z .. D-.. G 1 X •• Z •• D •• the transition chamfer
(or radius) separately
·in ·the Gl block under E.
The chamfer feed Eis
modal (self-retaining),
i.e. it remains valid
G1 X..Z.. D0.2 E0.08 for all transition cham-
-,
T cha!Jlfer feed rate
chamfer
fers Dor transition
radii R until it is re-
programmed.

-f- ! · Transition from Gl to

G2/G3 is also possible
by a chamfer or a radius-.
¢96 ! /
; R28 R6
! theoretical /
!~nd p o i n ~ Gl
: ~20
I I G1 Z-20 As
-}--- G3 X96 Z-48 A28
.....----48----..

3.44 PRAL04.94
1X SF 1NC 30/42-65
·-
 Progranming technique I

Important:
A block with transition chamfer Dor transi-
tion radius R must be followed by Glor G2/G3
in the next block as direction identification
for the transition element.
This next traverse must be greater than the
transition element.
Example: Formula for the minimum ath W:
·chamfer o· = 0.2 mm Wmin = DIR+ 0,1 + Rs [mm]
Wm1n
. -
= 0,2 + 0,1 + 0,4 =
0,7mm
T
cutter radius

GO XO Z1 MS
G1
G1
zo
X40
F0.2
00.5 E0.1
,
G1 Z-30 0~'
0 ,
-:; G1 ,
+--~~--J!
30
w
GO XO Z1 MS
Gl zo F0.2 G1 "'<)
G1 X40 R0.5 E0.1
.
G1 Z-30
.
..,
0
G1

30
w

GO XO Z1 MS
G1 zo F0.2
Gl A100 D-2
G1
E0,08
X86 Z-35 A-30
m
.
m
,;§>,
,
A100 , -,

L.
"°""""
GO XO Z1 MS
Gl zo F0.2
G1
G1
A100 R2
X86
E0,08
Z-35 A-30 .
m
m
,;§>,
,
A100
. , -,

L.

04.94PRAL
-3.45
lXBF
 ProgrilllJlling technique I

G01/G02/G03 - Geometry paths

Line - angle
G1 X... A. ..
or
G1 2... A. ..

Line - line
G1 A ..•
G1 X... 2... A. ..

..
Line+ chamfer - line
G1 A... o ... ( or 0-.. )
G1 X... 2... A. ..

A
POJGlUI

Line+ radius - line

G1 A... R. ..
G1 X... 2 ... A...

P03G120

Line - circular arc

(tangential]
G1 A...
G3 or
G2 .X... 2 ... R. ..

.A
R13Gt2t

04.94 PRAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3.46
1)( SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progriillllling technique I

x,z Circular arc - line

(tangential)
G2 -or
G3 R. •.
G1 X... Z... A •.

x,z Circular arc - line HO

A- ?
(non-tangential)
G3 .or
G2 P.. : 0 ... HO
G1 X... Z... A ..

x,z
:r· POJG311
Circular arc - line Hl
A- (non~tangential)
G3 .or
G2 P... 0... H1
G1 X... Z... A ..•

Po3GJ12

Line - circular arc HO/Hl

Q G1 A180
G2 X... Z ... P... Q .. J:lO (H1)

Al3G122
X,Z Circular arc+ chamfer - line
A-
(non-tangential)
G3 ur
G2 P... 0... D... H1
G1 X... Z... A..,.

PRAL04.94
3.47 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique I

Circular arc+ radius - line x,z

{non-tangential) A-
G3 er
G2 P... .0... C... H1
G1 X... Z... A. ..

:r· Q

X,Z·
Circular arc - circular arc
(tangential)
G3
G2
or
P... a...
1 ?

G2 or
G3 X. .. z... R. ..

:r· """'315

Note:
- The circulars arcs must curve in opposite
directions.

- One of them must be programmed by means

of the centre point coordinates P. Q.

04.94PRAL 3.48
1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique _I

Automatic definition of a geometry path

G101 • Geometry path I, longitudinal

G101* ..:z... I...K... J A...

feed rate
ang1e 2 from
end point ·
radius Rl
pitch/angle l from
start point.
centre point coordinates
for radius R2
target point coordinates
in absolute dimension-
"'Yariant l:
- If the first arc is defined by a radius, the second arc
must be described by the centre point coordinates I and K.
- There are only tangential transitions.

start point

z
Rl::!13fott

3.49 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
--
 Programning technique I

G101* x.. .z... ..B ... F•••

feed rjl.te
angle 2 from
end point •
radius R2
pitch/angle 1 from
start point ·
centre point coordinates
for radius Rl ·
target point coordinates
in absolute dimension

"Variant 2:
- If the first arc iss defined by the centre point co-
ordinates P and Q, the second arc must be described
by a radius. ·
- There are only tangential trans·itions.

a. start point

z
~1012

04.94PRAL 3.50
1X SF TNC 30/42-65
 PrograTillling technique I

Gl02* X••• z. .. I. .. K••• J/A ••• R••• B••• R•••

feed rate
angle 2 from
end point
radius Rl
pitch/angle 1 from.
start point
centre point coordinates
for radius R2
target point coordinates
in absolute dimension

*Variant l:
If the first arc is defined by a radius, the second arc
must be described by the centre point coordinates I and K.
- There are only tangential transitions.

·---~------

.start point

~nd point

z
POOG1021

04.94 PRAL
. 3.51 TX SF
Progranming technique I

G102" -X...z... P.-Q ... J/ ••• R •• 8 ••• F.

feed rate
angle 2 from
end point
radius R2
pitch/angle 1 from
start point
·centre point coordinates
for radius Rl
arget point coordinates
in absolute dimension

*Variant 2: .
- If the first arc is defined by the centre point co-
ordinates P and Q, the second arc must be described
·by a radius.
- There are only tangential transitions,

•
end P.oin_t

z
F03G1022

04.94PRAL 3.52
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming techni~ue I

G105• ·Geometry path II, longitudinal

G105* X.. .Z... I...K... J A...

feed rate
angle 3 from
end point
angle 2 from
start point
radius Rl
pitch/angle l from
start point
centre point coordina·tes
for radius R2
target point coordinates
in absolute dimension

*Variant 1:
- If the first arc is defined by a radius, the
second arc must be described by the centre
point coordinates I and K.
- There are only tangential transitions.

z
PoJGt051

04,94 PRAL 3.53

1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 fiRAUfJ. · Programning technique I

G10S-- ..:z.. .

feed rate
angle 3from
end point
angle 2 from
start point
radius R2
pitch/angle 1 from
start point ·
centre point coordinates
for radius Rl
target point coordinates
in absolute dimension

*Variant 2: .
- If the first arc is defined by the centre point
coordinates P and Q, the second arc must be de-
. scribed by a radius.
- There are only tangential transitions.

X
e~d point

a.

3.54 r·iAL 04.94

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
-
l-
 Progr~i~g technique _I

G1O6-•, Geometry path II, transverse

G10~

feed rate
angle 3 from
end point
angle 2.from
.start- point
radius Rl
pitch/angle 1 .fr.om
start point
centre point coordinates
for·radius R2
target point coDrdinates
in absolute·dimension

~variant 1:
- If the first arc is defined by a radius,
the second arc must be described by the
centre ·point coordinates I and K,
__ There are only tangential transitions.

X
st~rt point

end point

z P03G1061

.. 04.94PRAL 3.55
TXBFTNC 30/42-65
 PropriillJlling technique_!

G106"'

feed rate
angle 3 from
end point
angle 2 from
start_ point
radius R2
pitch/angle 1 from
start point
·centre point coordinates
for radius Rl
·target point coordinates
in absolute dimension

""Variant 2:
- If the first arc is defined by the centre point
coordinates P and K, the second arc must be de-
scribed by a radius.
- There are only tangential transitions.

X
st:a_rt. point

3.56 PRAL04.94
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
. -
 Progranming technique I

The dwell prograrraned in Additional G instructions

64 causes a time delay;
i.e. the next program G04- Dwell period
block will only be exe-
cuted after expiration G04 :lffi,!,,_ S•• B.. M ..
of this dwell.

Example: Drilling dwell

I
0,001S • 999,99S
After drilling 30 rran deep,
the retraction should only Application:
take place after 0.5 sec. Free-cutting of drills or recessing tools
during which the tool ("dwell": relief from tool pressure).
"dwells".

GO XO Z5 MB
-G1 2·30 F0.2
G4 X0.5 (0,5 s dllell l
GO Z5

~:~y~-
v": •," ,·

30

Note:
- 604 should be prograrraned without S-B-M.
The dwell starts only after execution of
the S-B-M functions.
After 694, 604 acts as dwell period whereas
after 695 a number of rotations can be de-
fined by 604.
The active function is displayed in the
CRT picture
TOOL/PARAM ~H7 menu 9Hl ProgPara:
# 7 604 time/s;
blue = OFF, i.e. depending on 694/695
yellow= ON, as dwell time.

04.94 PRAL 3.57

TX SF 1NC 30/42-65
 ProgriiDllling technique I

Example: Recessing
0,5 s dwel 1 for
cutting free GO X61 2·15 MS
G1 X40 F0.1
G4 X0.5(0,Ss dllell)
GO X61

F'03G401

=-

3.58 PRAL04.94
..
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

G20 - G21 - Selection of inch/mm programming

G20-

G20 fs
.... rs
... t
Input in inches

M instruction
B instruction
spindle speed
or cutting ~pee<!. .

Note:
- When programming dimensions in inches, four ·
places can be entered after the decimal _point.

G21-

G21 TS
.., r
Input__ in millimeters (mm)

tastructio,

B instruction
spindle speed
or cutting speed·

Note:
- When programming dimensions in millimeters (mm).
three places can be entered after the decimal
point.

04.94PRAL 3.59
TXBFTNC 30/42-65
 Progra11111ing technique I

Skip block functions

When the slash(/) character is used in front of a block, it
becomes a skip block,
e.g. /GOl Z-106 F0.2

Application:
There are many possibilities to use skip blocks. They are
programmed if certain machining steps are to be carried out
only.when required.
- Measuring loop
- Machining of recesses, cross holes, etc. required only
in some cases
- Facing of the bar after loading a new bar.
The programmed skip blocks are stored within the program.
They are activated only after the key for skip blocks on
the machine control panel has been pressed.
An exception is the automatic bar change with bar loading
magazines where a limit switch is automatically actuated
after the bar has been used up. This switch activates the
skip blocks (by internal switching impulses) for facing
the new bar.
After termination of the facing operation, the skip blocks
are deactivated by means of the M31 instruction.
Caution:
In connection with the bar loading magazine, no further
skip blocks can be written in the program.

04.94 PRAL
3.60 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique I

Example: Measuring loop for turning a 28.02 11111 0

During the lot size production of a critical dia-
meter (fit), each 5th workpiece e.g. must be checked
and the tool offset corrected, if necessary.
For this purpose, the fit must be turned with an allow-
ance (these NC blocks are provided with the skip char-
acter''/'' and are activated by skip block selection).
After the fit (+ 5 mm) has been .measured, it can be
corrected by modifying the offset memory. Now the skip
blocks can be deactivated. Then all current fit data
will be processed.

/N6G96V250T0606M04
/GOOX28.521 MOS
/G01Z-30F0.15
/G01X42
/G26
/MOO
G96V250T0606M04
G00X28.02Z1 MOS
G01 Z-30F0.15

These program blocks are processed only when

they have been activated by pressing the
key activating/deactivating the SKIP BLOCKS .

..• -

measuring pass

04.94PRAL 3.61
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

G36 - G38 - Opening of memory to enter

tool and parameter data

G36• Opening program memory

G36 S... B... M...

f Instruction
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
Caution:
- 636 must be programmed after 637 or/and 638 so that
the inputs made in these two G ·instructions can be
stored in the NC memory.
- ~6 is the switching-on condition.

G37• Opening tool me1110ry

.T- TT,~troctioo
G37

· B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed

....
3.62 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • . - - PRAL04.94
TX SF 1NC 30/42-65
 Pro_grilllllling technique I

After 637 has been programmed, the following

data can be stored in the tool memory: .

I
tool offset in
X and Z direction

offset number
preset time
in h, min
accumulated time
in h, min
tool nose (cutter) _radius
.
quadrant .
setting dimensions
in X and Z axes
too 1 number ·

Application:
- The data of tools measured outside the ma-
chine without ATC (Automatic Tool Control)
can be entered into the tool memory by means_
of this program step.

04.94PRAL 3.63
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

G38:. Opening parameter memory

G38 .. B... M...

T Instruction
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed

After 638-has been programmed, the following

data can be transferred to the parameter memory:

.Ad- .Ref.point .
Designation lnput
dres, ·coordinates . in
Ht x. .. z... · Tool changing point # 1
H2 z... G54 # 2
HS z... G55 # 3
H4 z... Zero point shif G56. # 4
HS z... G57 # 5
H6 x... z... # 6
H7 x... z... Chuck
barrier point # 7
HB x... z... # B
H9 x... z... # 9
Tailstock ·
H10 x... z... bar.rier point # 10
H11 x... z... # 11

•
· 3.64 PRAL04.94
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique I

GOS - Appro!!ching at feed rate

for internal measurements

GOS

M instructions
B instructions
spindle speed or
cutting speed
feed rate
target point coordinates in
absolute or incremental dimension

As regards the traversing movement, this

function is similar·to the GOl traversing
instruction, but the slide stops immedi-
ately after the gauging probe has reached
the workpiece.
The reset movement of the gauging probe
then depends on the traverse information
in the next program block •

.. 04.94PRAL 3.65
1X SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranmi_ng technique I

Tool nose radius compensation (TRC)

Instructions for tool nose radius compensation
G40-·Tool nose radius compensation OFF

r
G40 B.. M..

rnstruction
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed

G46--Tool nose radius compensation ON

G<6 i l,,troct;,,
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed

The tool nose radius compensation (TRC) of the

TX BF control is activated by 646 (in special
cases by G4l/G42 - see next page).
If the TRC is activated by 646, the drawing di-
mensions can be used directly and independently
of the cutting edge radius (without allowance).

·'---

with TRC without TRC ""'"'"'"

·- 04.94 PRAL . - -. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.66

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
fiRAUt1 Programning technique I

G4t- .Tool nose radius compensation -ON,

tool to the left of the contour
G41

r t,,u,,,,,,
-B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed

P03G&101

G42- Tool nose radius compensation ON.

tool to-the right.of the contour

G42

Tr M...

M instruction
B instruction
spindle speed or
cutting speed
-

""""2>1

3.67 PRAL04.94
1X SF TNC 30/42-65
-·~rogrilllJlling technique I
fiRAUafl .
The infonnation required for the geometry.calcu-
lation (tool nose radius R, position of radius
centre point P) is stored in the tool memory.
After the TRC has been selected, the control auto-
matically uses these tool data.

For the input of quadrant "P" it must in each

case be assumed that the tool tip is behind the
centre of rotation.

6
quadrants P 1 - . 8 ·

Excerpt fnxn tool file:

t
tool nose radius
quadrant
coordinates of tool.
:-related·to tool reference point
tool station

04.94PRAL 3.68
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 .Programning technique I

Characteristics of tool
nose radius compensation
- After selection of 646 the control moni-
tors a cutting range of 180°, irrespective
of the cutter shape. The position of the
cutting range depends on the quadrant.

-4------4-----!-- p8 P3

In special cases, monitoring of the cutting

range can be overridden by prograJmTiing 641
or 642 (instead of G46).
- If the TRC is activated by G46, the control
recognizes the traverse direction of the
tool in the four blocks iJmJJediately follow-
ing G46.
The cutting direction cannot be changed
without
E •
deactivation by G~O.
Note:
l. As long as G46 (G41/G42)
is active, at least three
s blocks of every five con-
secutive blocks must be
traverse movements.
2. As long as G46 is active,
s the block formats of the
following G functions are
acceptable:
GOO, GOl, GO2, GO3,
E GO4, GO9, G22, G41,
G42, G77, G79, G94,
G95, G96, G97.
3. The first traverse block
after selecting G46 (G41/
Caution: G42) must be prograJmTied
If an inadmissible G function is as straight line (600/GOl)
called up, the machine shuts down and not as circular arc
and an alarm is displayed on the (GO2/GO3).
CRT (screen).
3.69 PRAL04.94 ...•
PRAL TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programming technique I

646 - Tool nose radius compensation ON

After selection of G46 the approach movement is made at
rapid traverse (GOO).
The end point of this approach movement is reached in an
already compensated position since the control calculates
the equidistant path with the following contour element.
If the approach takes place with GOO, the tool nose should
be positioned at a safety distance of two times the cutting
edge radius from the bar to be machined .
. Caution:
- If the first movement after GOO is smaller than the
cutting edge radius, the machine shuts down and an alarm
is displayed on the CRT (contour protection):

G46
GO X40 Z1
G1 Z-3O F0.2

..,.
0
.

G46
GO X3O Z1
G1 ZO F0.2
G1 X40 D2 EO:1
G1 Z-3O

.
0
~

G46
GO X-0.8 Z1
G1 zo F0.2
G1 XO
G3 R15
G1 X3O Z-3O AO "'
cf
.
1

04.94 P R A L . ~ ' ! ' ! " ! ' ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.70

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

Behaviour during tool nose radius compensation

If the angle of two consecu-

angle smaller than tive blocks is smaller than
180 degrees
180 degrees, the control pro-
duces an angle bisector at the
intersection point of the two
blocks.
This position is approached
so that the tool (cutting edge
P03SKD4 radius) is tangent to both
straight lines.

P03SK05

If the angle of two consecu-

angle greater than tive blocks is greater than
180 degrees
180 degrees, the control pro-
duces a vertical at the start
point and end point of each
block.
The control automatically in-
serts the intermediate block
(circular arc).

F'03SK07

04.94 PRAL
3.71 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique I

By·reading five blocks

in advance during the
TRC, the control auto-
matically ignores a
programmed contour that
cannot be realized with
the specified cutting
edge radius. This is
done by calculating the
equidistant intersection
points._
-·-·-·-·-·-·-.----
\

Note:
No skip block·instruc-
tion is permitted
immediately ahead of -·-·-
640.

~K10

04.94PRAL 3.72
TX SF TNC 30/42-65 PRAL
 Progranming technique I

G4O - Tool nose radius compensation OFF

By the rapid traverse mo-

tion (GOO) the tool nose
radius compensation is
ignored temporarily, i.e.
on the last traverse
movement.
If the next block con-
tains again a feed motion,
the TRC is reactivated
PO:aG4002
immediately.

If the last feed movement

contains a transition ele-
ment (chamfer or radius),
the following GOl block
must contain a traverse
motion of at least
1 x transition element
+ tool nose radius
+ 0.1 mm.

PCl3G4003

04.94 PRAL
3.73 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progriillllling technique I

61 z-...
61 X90 A135
640
*
\,_
If the TRC is deactivated im-
mediately after a GOl block,
the last block will be exe-
cuted without compensation.
The contour in the last block
is falsified.

61 Z-••.
61 X90 A135
60 X91
640
If a GOO block is prograllllled
before TRC off bY 640, the
control calculates a vertical
to the target point at the
end of the last block.
The TRC is deactivated in the
following GOO block.

04.94 PRAL 3.74

TX SF 1NC 30/42-65 PRAL
 ProgrilllJlling technique I

. 61 2-•••
61 X90 Al35
60 X91 Al35
640
If an angle is programmed
under the address A in the
GOO block before G40, this
angle indicates the direc-
tion of the block entered
last. The last traverse mo-
tion is executed completely
taking into account the
actual cutting edge radius.
The TRC is deactivated in
the following 600 motion.

PRAL04.94
3.75
PRAL TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progri!DJlling technique I
fiRAUiJ .

61 Z-•••
61 X90 A135
640
If the TRC is deactivated im-
mediately after a GOl block,
the last block will be exe-
cuted without compensation.
The contour in the last block
is falsified.

61 Z-.•.
61 X90 A135
GO X91
640
If a GOO block is programmed
before TRC off QY G40, the
control calculates a vertical
to the target point at the
end of the last block.
The TRC is deactivated in the
following 600 block.

04.94PRAL 3.79
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65 PRAL
 Programning technique II

Programming technique II

·- 04.94 PRAL 4.1

TI< BF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II

Contents Chapter. Page

Roughing cycles 4 • 4

670 Longitudinal contour roughing cycle

for tools with approach angle J < 90° • 6
671 Longitudinal contour roughing cycle • 9
672 Face contour roughing cycle •13
673 Contour-parallel roughing cycle • 17
674 Longitudinal roughing cycle with/
without interrupted cut .20
675 Face roughing cycle with/
without interrupted cut .23
677 Longitudinal chamfer turning cycle .26
679 Face chamfer turning cycle .27
681 Repeat cycle for 677, 678, 679 .28

Drilling cycles 4 .29

683 Deep-hole drilling cycle l .29
684 Deep-hole drilling cycle 2 .31

Threading cycles 4 .33

Survey .33
633 Threading in single block mode .35
634 Threading in single block mode (variable pitch) .36
676 Thread chasing cycle .37
686 Thread chasing cycle for face threads .40
678 Thread chasing cycle for special threads .41
682 Threading/tapping cycle (taps and dies) .43

4.2 PRAL04.94
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II

Contents Chapter. Page

Subroutine technique 4 .44

G22 Subroutine call-up .44
Generic subroutines .48
Survey: Calculation, jump and comparison functions .51
G201 - G 299 Macro call-up .52
Instructions for creating a macro .53

4 .56
Drive for tools
C axis 4 .65

4.3
04.94PRAL
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Roughing cycJes a

Roughing cycles
Contour roughing

1.G7o- Longitudinpl roughing cycle

Generally, several roughing
roughing cuts passes are required before the
(passes) workpiece is ready for finish-
.a•.------1-4--- start·
,.__ _ _1-1,,._...,1.1 point cutting. If the roughing cuts
are programmed as single blocks,
the calculations are ·rather com-
plicated. The TX 8F features·
several cycles that execute
these geometry calculations
automatically. ·
P04G700l
2.G71-·Longitudina1·roughing cycle
roughing cuts
~ (passes) start·
point
"O" ill------14--4-l

P04G7101
3. G72- -Face roughing cycle

roughing
-+=-Jl'+cuts
(passes)

end po1n,c
L-------finished contc.ur
"Q"
4. G73- .Contour-parallel roughing cycle """'"'"
. (f. K) "1
-----:;'"~~
-"-,-,+r=====----~
end point ~
- - - - - -.. 1 11
finished contour -- aux. point I I 1
\ \ \
"0" '. \\ \\
cuts 11\ For the roughing cycles G70 to
(passes)\~• orner point G73, the related finished con-
start tour is used by the control to
roughing calculate the individual rough-
..___ _ _ _ _ ___. =='--Start point ing cuts .
fi ni shed con-
tour "P"

4.4 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progrilllliling technique II
Roughing cycles

·The finished contour for the roughing cycle can be

programmed in two ways:
1. The finished contour towards which roughing is
performed, is stored in the main program.
Contour start and end are always marked by a block
number. The block number for the contour end must
always be greater than th~t for the contour start.
Note: A block number must never exist in duplicate.
- If the roughing cuts
are to be executed G96 . V1BO T505 M04MOB
with tool nose radius
compensation (TRC), GO- X100 Z2
11
646 must be pro-
11 G71 PSO 060 10.5 KO.OS D4 F0.3
grammed in the fin- G26
ished contour. Then •
the control takes N~O G;J
over the quadrant (P) GOO X20 Z1
and the tool nose ra-
dius (R} from the
tool data file. • finished
- When defining the fin- • contour
ished contour, the •
first block must be N60 G40
a traverse motion (GOO
or 601) in both axes •
(X .. and z•• ) to the
start point of the •
finished contour.
From the position of
•
the start point and 2. The finished contour towards which rough-
end point the control cutting takes place, is stored as.a subroutine.
recognized the start
point for "roughing
outside" or "roughing
inside". •
- The finished contour •
can consist of max.
50 blocks.
- As a rule, a descend-
ing contour·section
•
G96 V1BO T505 M04M08
GO X100 22
G71 ~ IO.SK0.05 D4 FO..
s UP (subroutine)
0520
G46
GO X2O Z1
·within 670 is auto-
matically ignored.
G26 •
- If the finished con- • • finished
tour of 671 and 672 • • contour
contains a descend- •
ing contour section, •
it will be turned in M99
the roughing cycle
by programming G88
and ignored if 689
is programmed.

Q4.95 PRAL 4.5

· 1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progra111I1ing technique II
Roughing cycles

G70 - Longitudinal contour roughing cycle

r
for tools with approach angle J <: 90°

G70 A•. P •• Q•• b K •• D•• J •• F ••

11 spindle speed or
cutting speed

feed rate
Application:
The longitudinal roughing
approach angle of tool cycle G70 is used if tools
depth of cut with an approach angle smaller
than 90 degrees are employed.
machining allowance
in Z direction
machining allowance in X direction

definition of finished contour

A: The finished contour is stored in a sµbroutine.

P and Q: The finished contour is stored between the
block numbers P and Q.

start -pcffrit - ,
fini,:sh.ed contour npn

04.94 PRAL
4.6 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
Roughing cycles

The approach angle is pro-

grammed under the address J.
It ·should be ~hosen to be
approx. 1 - 2 degrees smaller
than the actual angle of the
tool.
As· a function of this angle
J and the depth of cut pro-
grammed under D, the control
calculates, after G70 call- D
up, the individual roughing
cuts, taking into account
the finishing allowances
(I and K) for the subsequent
finishing cuts.
t

The tool must be measured as shown below:

With the roughing cycle G70

all roughing·cuts are exe-
cuted with the "entire•
cutting depth D. It is,
therefore necessary to cal-
culate the depth of cut
• accurately.
When calculating the dept;;..::.:,~------~
of cut D, the value entered
under I must be taken into
.account (see example on next
page).
start point
When using G70, the start finished contour
point of the finished con-
tour must be fixed in+ Z di-
rection away from the work-
piece, in accordance with
the approach angle and the
depth of cut.

~ ATC

·· 04.94PRAL 4.7
1X BF 1NC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
Roughing cycles

Po&G7DOS
( ROUGHING)
G96 V160 T101 M04
GOO X90 ZS
G70 PSO 060 l0.8 K0.1 D6.33 J73 F0.4
G26
•
•
• ( FINISHING)
G96 V180 T505 M04
4
NSO G46
GO X25 ZS ~

G1 Z-36 F0.15 0

G1 X24.4 A210 F03

G1
G1
Z-40
X65
F0.15
RSE0.1 -
G1 Z-81
X64.4 A210 F01
"°"'-
G1
G1
G1
Z-85
X90
F0.15 ..
!:!fil! G40
G26 finishing
roughing _facing
•
• T1 T3 TS
•
M30
0

·-.
PO<G71>07

4.8 PRAL04.94
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
-
 ProgriiIIIIling technique II
Roughini cycles

G71- Longitudinal contour roughing cycle

Application:
G71 A..P.. Q .. I.. K.. D.. F.. rE-. t .
spindle speed or
The longitudinal rough- cutting· speed
•ing cycle 671 is used
for external and internal feed rate with
•machining. descending contour
feed·rate
depth of cut
machining allowance
in Z direction
machining allowance
in X direction
definition of finished contour
A: · The finished contour is stored in a
subroutine.
P and Q: The finished contour is stored between
the block numbers P and Q.

roughing cuts (passes)

start point
------+t--Tt
C

..
start point
11
finished contour P11

F04G7102

.. 04.94PRAL 4.9
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Roughing cycles

If the finished contour

contains a descending
contour section, it will
be turned in the roughing
cycle by programming 688
before 671, and ignored
by programming 689 before
671. Machining of the
descending contour sec-
tion must be suppressed
by 689 in ·case the fonn
of the roughing tool is
not suitable for the op-
eration.
For machining a descend-
ing contour section, the
feed rate can be reduced.
This reduced feed rate is
programmed under the
address E.
If no value is entered
P04G7103 under E, the control auto-
matically uses the feed
rate value programmed
under.F. After completion
of the roughing cycle on
a descending contour sec-
tion, the tool is auto-
matically retracted from
the shoulder. The re-
traction distance (lift-
ing travel) is to be set
as parameter with a value
-------- of max. 99.999 mm in
TOOL/PARAH * H7 menu ~
H3 - Set Up l I 15 671
retraction.
If the infeed for the last
~-···· roughing cut is smaller
.. ,.. _ ·- than the set parameter value
ti/:,··:-·.~-·:. :-·,·::·:·· :-:=..-
"min. cutting depth", the
last roughing cut is exe-
cuted with this parameter
value. It is defined in
TOOL/PARAM * H7 menu ~
H3 - Set Up l I 13 small
lifting travel
(parameter value)
allowance.
The modified cutting depth
for the preceding roughing
cuts is automatically re-
calculated by the control.

-,.,,.
4.10 PRAL04.94
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 .Progranming technique II-
Roughi~g- C.)'._Cles

Example:

•
• 120

• ( ~ou~~ING) 2x45"
G96 V160 T404 M04
GO X105 Z2M08 45
·GBS
G71 P50 ~ IO.SK0.05
D4 F0.35 E0.12
G89
G26 M09
• 1x45°

•
• ( FINISHING)
G96 V200 T505 M04
filQ G4S
GO X25 Z1 MOB
G1 X30 D2F0.15 E0.1
G1 Z-15 PO&G7105
Gt X65 RS
Gt Z-45
Gt X38 A205 F0.1
G1 Z-120 R6F0.15
G1 X102 03
G1 W-4
~ G40

G26 M09
•
•
• T4 T5
M30

04.94PRAL 4.11
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
HRAUi] . Progranming technique II
Roughing cycles

Example:
•
•
• . (ROU§Hl!I_G)
G96 V150 T202 M04
GO X28 Z2M08
G89
G71 P51 061 I0.SK0.05
03.S F0.25
G27 M09
•
•
.
0
M .
0
~

• _(~INISHING)
G96 V180 T404. M04
fill G4S
35
GO X120 ZOMOB
Gt A270 RtO FO.tS EO.t
65 Gt X70 z.35 A20
75 Gt X60
P04G7t07 Gt Z-62
Gt U0.3 AtSO FD.OB
Gt Z-65 RD.6
Gt X40
Gt Z-75
Gt X29
~ G40
G27
0
"' -
M
0
•
•
•
M30
PCMG7108

0 .0

T2 T4

4.12 PRAL04.94
TX 8F 1NC 30/42-65
 ProgrilllJlling technique II
Rou_ghi_ng ·cycles

G72 • Face contour roughing cycle

G72 A..P.. Q •. ·1.. K.. l:i.. F.. E.. S ..

Application:
The face roughing cycle
G72 is used for external I
~ldle·speed or
~utting speed
feed rate with·
and internal machining.· ,
descending contour
feed rate
depth bf cut
machining-allowance
in Z direction
machining allowance
in X direction
definition of finished contour

A: The finished contour is stored in a

subroutine.
P and Q: The finished contour is stored between
the block numbers P and Q.

K
start --•:
point I
r+-i~ D ~
I I I I
finished contour npn lt :I :I :I :
I

' ' '

roughing
cuts (passes)

--,i
.__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___, end point
finished contour
11 "Q"

.. 04.94 PRAL 4.13

TX SF TNC 30/42-65

I
 , Progranming technique II
Roughing ·cycles

If the finished contour contains

a descending contour section. it
will be turned in the roughing
F cycle by programmjng GSa before
672, and ignored by progra11111ing
689 before 672. Machining of the
descending contour section must
be suppressed by G89 in case the
form of the roughing tool is not
suitable for the operation.
F For machining a descending con-
F tour section. the feed rate can
be reduced. This reduced feed
rate is programmed under the
address r.·
If no value is entered under E.
the control automatically uses
the feed rate value programmed
under F. After completion of the
roughing cycle on a descending
contour section, the tool is
automatically retracted from the
turned shoulder.
The retraction distance (lifting
travel) is to be set as parameter
with a value of max. 99.999 mm.

If the infeed for the last rough-

ing cut is smaller than the set
parameter value "min. cutting
=_:;-===t- !~!!!?
______~:_=_=_=_=_ depth". the last roughing cut
is executed with this parameter
-
value. The modified cutting depth
for the preceding roughing cuts
is automatically recalculated by
the control.

4.14 PRAL04.94
..
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Roughing. cycles

Example:

35
•
•
( ROµG~I_NG)
•
G96 V16D TSOS M04
GO X145 21 MOB
G88
G72 P70 ~ 10.1 KO.S
D3.5 F0.25 ED.1
G89
G26 M09
• 8
• 0

"'" "
• (FINISHING) 1,5x45°
G96 V18D TSOB M04
fill! G46
GO X142 Z-35 MOB
"' .
G1 X100 R10 F0.2 E0.1 "
G1 Z-8 D1
G1 XBO
G1 Z-16 A245 F0.1
G1 X25 RSF0.15
G1 zo.s D2
G1 U-3
~ G40
G27 M09
•
•
•
M30

TS TB
0

04.94PRAL
4.15
1X BF 1NC 30/42-65
 PrograJJJ!ling technique II
Roughing cycles

Note:
As a rule, finishing is to
be carried out in the same
direction as roughing.
Should it, however, be nec-
essary for technical reasons
to reverse the finishing
direction, the finished con-
tour (which is required to
calculate the roughing
-passes) must be stored in
a subroutine.
.,"'
" ·- -
12
25
40
F'04G7207

•
•
•
G96 V140 T505 M04
GO X30 Z2M08
G89
G72 AS20 10.5 KO.OS D3.5
F0.3 Subroutine
G27 MD9 Finished contour
• Roughing cycle
0520
• G4S
• GO X33 2-40
G96 V180 T808 M4 G1 X85
G4S G1 2-25
GO X150 21 MS G1 A90
G1 XO 20.2 G1 X110 2-12 A220
G1 X140 R3 ED.1 G1 X140
G1 2-12 G1 20 R3
G1 X110 G1 X150
G1 2-25 A220 G40
G1 xss M99
G1 2-37
G1 X85.6 A150 F0.1
G1 240 R0.6 0 ·.
G1 X34
G40
TS TS
GO 210
G26 MD9

4.16 ·
- .....-;
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ -- • PRAL 04.94
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Prograllllling technique II
Roughing cycles

t
G73- Contour-parallel roughing cycle
G73 .P. W. F E..

spindle speed or
cutting speed
. feed rate with
descending contour
r
eed rate
depth of cut
machining allowance
in X and Z direction
allowance on blank
related to finish contour
definition of finished contour

A: The finished contour is stored in a

subroutine. '
P and Q: The finished contour is stored between
the block numbers P and Q.
Application:
The cycle for contour-
parallel roughing G73 is
used for workpieces with
a shape that is about
equivalent to the contour
of the finished part.
(for IQ ~
- , D. - ----,~ I ....n.
: : - - - - - - - - -
--.K-: : -••-•• -••••••• ,''I I I - I ~
I GVV '
I I f --- J
: : I ---- -~- I I I
end point :I .,_ii--!~•••
l . . . , , . . point:. II
auxiliary
-------- II II
fi ni"shed contour "On ( he 1per point) I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
roughing cuts \ I I
(passes) \ \ \
I 1 I
I ~ theor •.
\ I ..,.. _,,-'corner point

~====t--~'w-....,tr7
'D
;_.t start
"-------!--~•----'-roughing

''~w__;
7 '
'
start point
L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . J f i n i s h e d contour "P"

4.17
04.94PRAL
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Roughing_ cycles

If the finished contour·contains a descending

contour section, it will be turned in the rough-
ing cycle by programming 688 before 673, and
ignored by programming 689 before 673.
Machining of the descend-
ing contour section must
be suppressed by 689 in
F . case the fonn of the
roughing tool is not
F suitable for the opera-
tion.
For machining a descend-
F ing contour section, the
feed rate can be reduced.
This reduced feed rate
is programmed under the
address E.
If no value is entered
under E, the control auto-
matically uses the feed
rate value programmed
under F.
The rough part (blank)
allowance related to the
Direction and sign: finished contour is de-
fined .in the addresses
U and Ware always entered from the rough U and W.
part to the finished part. The sign must
be specified when making ,the input.

theoretici!l
corner po1nt
tu+ The allowance for the fin-
ishing cut is indicated in
either I or K. If the fin-

W-r-W
. u-
.. +
ishing allowance is entered
under I, the cutting depth
infeed Dis in X direction;
when entered under K, it is
-
in Z direction.
Note:
- Before calling up G73, the tool must be positioned on
an auxiliary (helper) point.
Thi_s point must be chosen so that during retraction of
the tool toward the auxiliary point and during infeed
for the subsequent roughing cut, there will be no col-
lision with the rough part (blank).

•
4.18 PRAL04.94
lX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Prograuming technique II
Roughing cycles

Example:

85
G96 V130 T303 M04 3
GO X95 21 MO~ W-
G73 PSO Q60 10.5
W+
U+
U-10 W-3 D2 F0.3
G26 M09 40
•
•
•
G96 V150 T404 M04
'
NSO G4S
GO X25 21 MOB
G1 A180 F0.15
G1 XSS 2-40 A-55
G1 A180 R12
G1 X95 PO<GT.305
Z-85 A-75
N60 G40
G26 M09
•
•
•
•
M30

04.94PRAL 4.19
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
Roughing cycles

G74 • Longitudinal roughing cycle with7

without internipted cut

r
K.. D.. F..

fled rate
lifting travel
during retui:n
length of cut
between interruptions
depth of cut
corner point of surface to be rough-cut
in absolute or incremental dimension
The longitudinal rough-
ing cycle is called•up
by the instruction 674.
cut inter-
The final diameter of
ruptions. the contour is entered
roughing under the address X••• ,
cuts the final length under
rK:;'.:SI:/ z...
r------•-·····
"
•--• I• - - - • a • I- :,;,;;,:::.·.····
From the position of
the start point to be
approached in GOO or
GOl, and the X value
•
"l start point
;::: end point programmed in G74 the
control recognized
whether internal or
I I external roughing is
to be performed.
I t
I
-t ¢X
Ir ~ .
~~
z

4.20 PRAL04.94
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Roughing cycles

To cause chip.breakage where lorig chips occur, the

tool is retracted in a direction opposite to the
cutting direction after it has reached the length
of cut programmed under K. The amount is indicated
as parameter in the operating mode<TOOL/PARAM>in
Set Up 1 # 17.
The depth of cut is prograrrmed under the address I.
After each rough-cutting length Z the tool is re-
tracted by the value entered.
With cut interruption
GO X70 21 ;..'; oe.---soi--~)I,• !:I
G74 X30. 2-50 15 KB I I
I I
D1 F0.3
G26

Without.cut interruption
GO X70 21
G74 X30 2-50 15 K51
D1 F0.3
G26

If the longitudinal rough-

ing cycle is used for a
face plunge cut, the value
of the lifting travel D '.
... ·. ·.. · ... tool

.· ·1--
N ::..

must be entered with the ·.-: ~.. .. \llidth 4 mm

sign - (minus).
Due to this sign, the re-
traction from the contour
{--=~.~~~-...
..
starts only with the second
cut. ¢70

I
I
I

GO X62 21
G74 X40 2-8 I3.7K9
0-0.3 F0.08
G26

.. 04.94 PRAL 4.21

1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming tech~ique II
Roughing cycles

If the cycle is used for

.longitudinal drilling, the
addresses X/U, I and D must
not be entered.
For this application, the
drill is not completely re-
tracted from the hole for
chip breakage, but only by
the parameter value
<TOOL-PARA> Set Up 1, # 17.

GO XO Z2-
G74Z·38 K10 F0.1
G27

4.22 PRAL04.94
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progrii!lllling technique II
Roughing cycles

G75- Face roughing cycle with/

without interrupted cut

G75
K..rO_ t .
feed rate
lifting travel
during return
depth of cut
length of cut
between interruptions
~orner point of surface to be rough-cut
in absolute or incremental dimension
The face roughing cycle
is called up by the 675
instruction. The final
diameter of the contour
to be roughed is entered
under the address X••• ,
the final length under
the address Z•••
:-.K.-
I' II Io

"I,• - - - -
,,wt&,_rl _7
From the positon of the r-:---:-:---:---:...,.!---4-+-J-..:J--f"
start point to be ap-
proached in GOO or GOl, i t
.. sUlrt point
= end point

and the X value pro- I I

grammed in G75 the con-
trol recognizes whether
J--+-i--+---t-~. + -
I
internal or external I
I
roughing is to be per-
formed. t--t--t-t--r---.•,
i ----
1--1--+-1--t--1=
1--1--+-1--1--1_
!,,,,,,-- cut inter-
ruptions

...,jf--.-1.:-f--_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ roughing
cuts

I'
I

'
'
• I •

.;
I -

• I
' ·•
•
~-
~ .. .:.).: .. 1
t¢X
• !" •
!

----z---••
",~ I

·- 04.94 PRAL 4.23

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 PrograD111ing technique II
Roughing cycles

To cause chip.breakage where· long chips occur, the

tool is retracted in a direction opposite to the
cutting direction after it has reached the length
of cut programmed under I. The amount is indicated
as parameter (TOOL/PARAM ~ H7 menu "' H3 Set Up l # 17).
The depth of cut is programmed under the address K.
After ead1 final ·diameter obtained in the roughing
cycle the tool is retracted by the value programmed
under D•...

With cut interruption

GO X72 Z-3
3
G75 X25 Z-20 18 K3
00.8 F0.25
G26

Without cut interruption

GO X72 Z-3
G75 X25 Z-20 123.5 K3
00.8 F0.25
G26

"'"'.,

If the face roughing

cycle is used for a
plunge cut, the value of
the lifting travel D
must be entered with
the sign - (minus).
Due to this sign, re-
traction from the con-

.
K
tool .. tour starts only with
width 4 rm, the second cut.
.._]
.
.. GO X54 2·19
G75 X40 Z-35 17 K3.7
"'·•
... ....
. "'"'"
D-0.3 FD.OB

.
....
0 •··
15

r.
G26

'-: ~"'
35

4.24 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning techniqUi!":i:I
Roughing cycles

If the face roughing cycle is used

for cross drilling, the addresses
2/W, Kand D must not be entered.
For thie application, the drill is
not completely retracted from the
hole for chip breakage, but ·only
by the parameter value.
(<TOOL/PARA) Set Up l f 17).

GO X62 Z·25
G75 U-21 15 F100

""''"'°'

04.94PRAL 4.25
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progriill'llling technique II
Roughing cycles

G77- Longitudinal chamfer turning ~ycle

G77 =:.:;-,=c.:.•• I••• K...

r F•••

fr: rate
41stance from start point
to chanfer start.? ~xis
distance from chamfer start
to chamfer end X axis
coordinates of target point
in absolute or incremental dimension

start point
---------------------+.·
1
1
chamfer
end
. I =
I
end.point

~-~-~- I .
:. _._ -l•. :. _ L:~·-:_-_-- _. ~~:~er .i
•
-·-:. ·•·...
. •r;..•-----_,K11.----1----;,..;
.. :~:- .. .; •·. ·..:::.: ~ . :
"-.;".:"
... -. :
·•.
.
·_
: ,::.,·:_.:-
t
¢X
-------z-----~ I

4.26 PRAL04.94
....•
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 ----------------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~

Progriillllling technique II
Roughing·cycles

G79- Face chamfer turning cycle

•--r l~
G79 X/U.. ZIW-

rare
distance from chamfer start
to chamfer end Z axis
distance from start point
to chamfer start X axis
coordinates of target point
in absolute or incremental dimension

+
• • • • • • • • • • • • - - start point
= end point
I
I
I
I
.. :., . ,-.. ~I· I
.".-=·'. ' . chamfer I
I
·start

. :!-.
chamfer
end'I
I
:_; r··+X
·: - . .-,~J.•:----K--+-';,,.; ¢

I
.---z---~

•· 04.94PRAL 4.27
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 i Programning technique II
Roughing cycles

G81- Repeat cycle for 677. 678, 679

.rIbe,
GS1 U.. W.. H••

of ,ep,titioos

start point shift in

Z direction for next pass
start point shift in
X direction for next pass

::::,
,
,,,ww

PG&GS101

If G78 is repeated, the last pass is devided

by G81 (U/2, U/4, U/8, U/8).

4.28 PRAL04.94
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
Drilli!IQ cycles

G83 - Deep-hole dr.illing cycle l

G83 D- H- F-

rfid rate
number of relief cycles
I for remaining drilling depth
first drilling depth ·
drilling-depth for longitudinal or
cross hole drilling in absolute or
incremental dimension

Application: H= number of
relief cycles
Deep-hole drilling cy-
cles are required for
holes that are deeper
than three times the
diameter. Before call-
ing up G83, the start
point must have been
approached at rapid
traverse GO or at feed
rate Gl.
The first drilling depth
(related to the start
point) is programmed
under the address D. By
the input of address H
the ranaining drilling feed rate
depth (number of relief
cycles) is divided into
equal distances.

Note:
- a= Safety distance for rapid traverse.
- The safety distance must be set as para-
meter in TOOL/PARAM ~ H7 menu 9 H3-SetUp1
# 26 with a max.·value of 99.999 mm.

04.94 PRAL 4.29

TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progr.allllling t~chnique iI
Drilling cycles

Example:

remaining dri,1..:.1..:.in:..g,.__;,,~:.,.t.irst drill;,

depth .- , .. ,ng depth t
1,-:- 3x reH e:f-.! l :
i c cl.e f l 1 I
•I start point The drill point is
••• prograrmned •
• ll 20
N1 G97 S1=480 T101M3
GO XO 25 MS
G83 Z-90 D35 H3 FD.2
G25 M9
drill point

Note:
- Used for concentric and eccentric ho1es
(with rotating too1s).
- The dri11ing cyc1es 683 and 684 can a1so
be used for cross holes (with driven tools).
In that case, the target point is not pro-
grarmned with Z, but with X.

•
4.30 PRAL04.94
TX 8F TNC 30/42~65
 Programning technique
Drilling cycles

G84-Deep-hole drilling cycle 2

0 .. I.. IC.. A.. 0 •• R•• F ••

i r d rate
dwell* after
each relief cycle
dwell after reaching
each drilling depth
safety distance before
any further dri111ng depth
any further drilling depth
first drilling depth
rough-drilled depth
less safety distance
dri ling depth for longitudinal
Application: or cross hole drilling in
The drilling cycle G84 is absolute or·mcremental dimension
similar to G83.
,. . . . -··· ...
In addition, it is possible
to program the dwell period ·._:i···,; :..:~-=;~})~i~.--. .~:;~:~.:.:· :_ -=·- ·- start point
~ end point
Q for cutting free after
each drilling depth, and ··.Ist =~ -~~~-:-;:;-·-cc-;=-=..:-1-
:···..
:-.. •.,

the dwell period R for cool- {-,-,lllf--+~~-~-

ing and flushing after each
relief cycle.
A premachined hole can be
traversed at rapid traverse. rough .. dri 11 ed
This rapid traverse is pro-
grammed under D.
---+--+----t:2:--1---~
• The first drilling depth
after the rapid traverse D
is called I. feed rapid
l+'-=a'--+'tc:r~~~
The difference between G84
and G83 is that· in G84 each
additional drilling depth
is programmed under K (the
number of relief cycles H
is not necessary here).
The safety distance for the
-----------
rapid traverse (e.g. 0.5 mm)
must be programmed under A.

* Programming of dwell period: see page 3.57!

04.94PRAL
4.31
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
· Drilling cycles

Example: Pre-drilling ·.li 20 x 15 deep

(Pre-drilling)
N1 G97 S1=48O T1O1M3
dri 11 20 lllll di a. GO XO ZS MB
T101 G1 Z-15 F0.2
G25 M9

------- I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
1
'-ls-15
1 I
..-.--
I

(Deep-hole drilling)
1K1l1D1
N2 GSl7 S1=9SO T202M3
14
1 •••13•••
101 1 ·rap,-d' 1
1 GO XO ZS MB
1 traverse G84 Z-52 D19 113 K1O
I
I I I drill 10 mm dia. AO.5 00.5 RO.5 FO.2
I I I
I I ,,..--1 I T 202 G25 M9
:---::::-..,

_ __,I I :
- I lI I

• deep-hole drilling
52
0 10
• rm,
!5~ •---

4.32 PRAL04.94
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 -
· Programning technique II
Thread~ng cycles

Threading cycles
Survey
The TX BF control offers various functions and
cycles for threading:
1. 633 - Threading in single block mode

target point start point

- . -
:.¢'.,-fx/-_Y_.
. ·:·::\ ·?•:--\,.::})_;~ ):~ <·-_:-"
-. ·:·
r -
.
-------z--------,

2. 634 - Threading.in single block mode

(variable pitch)
• • F+BC I F+SK I f+,x I F+31( I I I
f+2!( F+K F •

3. 676 - Thread chasing cycle

start point
=endpoint

.----------------------------------,

•..
I I
I I

.
I I

I\' run-oUt i
•
''
, angle
'K ....._
____
.;.
1

th rea d ,,,,
, I
.......,.•••••I
end_point ~ +•••J

l
¢X
:.-~u-n-·-o..,u~··~
width

I
....------z-------
04.94 PRAL 4.33
1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
Threading cycles

4. 686 Thread chasing cycle :•.r•,,-•----·• =start point

end point
I I+
1+
+

~· . .;. ··..
. ·.·

thread
end point
___ __ ,.._

1
fi\X

z
I
5. 678 - Thread chasing cycle r
!t;~ :~~~~
r·---------------------- .,
I I
lit I
I ' I
taper
end
11t,\, , I
I
I
I
taper start ,½

• K--+--,• :¢ X
il
'-------z-----....:r
6. GB2 - Tapping cycle
.
.: - drilling deptn start point
.•• =endpoint

•
::• ,
,. .,"
lf: - .
,7
.:• :
I
. -
. •• :
..•: ..
•

4.34
ove rrun travel
(depends on
spindle speed and__J
thread pitch)
-- z

PRAL04.94 ....
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 -Prograuming technique II
Threading cycles

G33 - -Threading in single block mode

G:33 =~=-· .E[g,,_ B•. M..

rM I
instruction
B instruction
tliread pitch
F: 3 places after. decimal point
E: 5 places after decimal point
coo.rdinates of target point
i~ absolute or incremental dimension

••
target po;nt start point
- . '
-~/
'
-¢X

..
i--------z------~
G34 - Threading in single block mode (variable pitch)
G34 X/U ..Z/W.. F/E..

tJt•stmtio, .
I_ B instruction
va·lue of variable pitch
progressive(+),
degressive · (-)
thread pitch
F: 3 places after decimal point
E: 5 places after decimal point
coordinates of target point in
absolute or incremental dimension

F+6K F+SK F+4K F+3K

• 4

F-6K I F-SK I F-4K I F-3K F-2K F-K F

•• I I I •
4.35
04.94PRAL
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranuning technique II
Threading cycles

With the function 633 (threading in single block mode),

any thread can be turned or cut.
Prerequisite is a spindle speed (G97 S... ) on the main
spindle and a feed (pitch) in mm/rev (G95). Possible
thread types:-
- Cylindrical external or internal threads,
- tapered external or internal threads,
- face threads,
- thread cutting (taps or threading dies).
When calling up the first G33 block (or in case of direction reversal)
the control automatically synchronizes the main spindle drive with the
feed drive. By this synchronization the control finds the start of the
thread for each pass of the thread chaser.
To.turn a thread with G33, the thread chaser must first approach the
start position (in GOO).
This start position must be selected so that the tool has reached the
predetermined traverse feed before it starts cutting. Moreover, the brak-
ing effect of the feed drives must be taken into account.
With all threadi_ng cycles where the address E is available, tlie thread
pitch per inch can be entered directly. The machine automatically cal-
culates the -pitch in mm/rev which can then be checked in MONITOR-MODAL-
H3 at F/E= ...
For this function, setting of the parameter #14 in the picture TOOL/PARA-
H7-PROG.PARA HI is not allowed.
Caution:
On machines with IPS #14 must be set (high-lighted in yellow) because the
IPS always operates with input E. The IPS converts inches into mm.
With the function 634 (threading in single block mode), variable pitch)
it is possible to cut threads where the pitch is changed progressively or
degressively from pass to pass.
Input of the pitch difference (from pass to pass) takes place under
the address K.
For this application
___________________ __, it is recommended to
. use the threading
cycle G7 6 - ~G-9_7_S~1~=1_0_00-T40_4_M_0_3_----,
M30x1,5 GO X29.2 Z4 MOS
\
G33 Z-29,5 F1 ,5

""
GOX35
GOZ4
---- - - - - - GOX28.8
G33Z-29.5
GOX35
' GOZ4

GOZ4
30 GOX28.16
G33Z-29.5
GOX35
9
- G29 M0
04. 94 PRAL
4.36 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ T ' ! ' ! ! X ~ S F TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
Threading cycles

G76- Thread chasing cycle

G76
k·-t
Application:
r depth of cut of
last chasing pass
input of infeed angle
thread pitch
Cylindrical or tapered F: 3 places after decimal point
external and internal E: 5 places after decimal point
threads can be produced
with.the thread chasing number of chasing passes
cycle 676. · depth of thread
I: taper of taper thread
J: angle input for taper thread
max.~ 45°
coordinates of thread end point in
absolute or incremental dimension
start point
. . = end point

·------------------------------------,
I .. I
I I
~
1I "\ run-out III
· ,;:·: . -, ,,',
."'thread
.:,~nd _- .~
"\ angle

,,, K
+-------=
-+•••••I
.. point ....._•••'

.:·_ ! .
. •
-,,-,-! ......
........

1. ! .. I•
t .run-out
"idth
• I

¢X !

.
I'
..-------z--------

--;
• .
F ,..•--

1\/VVV\
--~. F '-,--

04.94PRAL 4.37
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progriillllling technique II
Threading cycles

The input of angle J for taper threads is limited to

+/- 45 degr~es, i.e. the feed (pitch) relates to the
Z axis.
Prerequisite is a spindle speed (G97 S••. ) on the main
spindle and a feed (pitch) in mm/rev (G95).
Before stating G76, a start point in the X and Z axis
must be approached.
The control uses this start position and the X position
prograrrnned in the cycle to compare internal and external
threads.
The start position in the Z axis must be selected so
that the tool has reached the preset traverse speed
(spindle speed x feed rate) before it starts the actual
cutting operation. Moreover, the braking effect of the
feed drives must also be taken into account. The con-
trol automatically divides the individual cuts in the
cycle on the basis of the thread depth prograrrnned under
Kand the number of passes programmed under H.
For this division, the last infeed (programmed under
the address D) is taken into consideration.
With the value pro-
grammed under address A
the infeed in the G76
can take ·place at an
angle up to the max.
flank angle.

If a thread without .
thread relief is turned,
an additional thread_
run-out between 45-6G 0

can be switched on by
i.--z--- programming M35 (off
by M36).
The length of the run-
out as well as the
run-out run-out angle are set
angle as parameter
thread
end point
. I
I
TOOL/PARAM = H7 menu=
H3 Set Up l
I .
----]lo--,1run-ouUi1
1wi dth
•---
.J

# 11 thread run-out
0.1 x F x input
# 12 run-out angle.

4.38 PRAL04.94
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 ProgrillJll1ing technique II
Threading cycles

Examples:
Cylindrical exter:r!al-yiread

N3 G97 S1=1000 T303M3

GO X40 2A MS
G76 XSS.1 Z-29 K0.92 HS
F1 .5 A50 DO.OS
G26 M9

Cylindrical internal thread with thread relief

NS G97 S1=1400 lBOSMS

GO X20 2A MS
G76 X24 Z-24 KO.55 H7
F1 00.03
G26 M9

25
F'O<G7606

Taper external thread

N!I G97 S1=1200 T909M3

-~-·------------•
GO X36 Z6 M35 MB
G76 XS0.836 Z-19.1 J1.7 I
K1.479 H1O F2.309 . -; ' - .
- - .J
DO.OS .:::··:: .
G26 M36 M9

19.1
"""'''"

04.94 PRAL 4.39

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Threading cycles

G86 - Thread chas.ing cycle for face threads.

GS6
k.t
r
depth of cut of
last chasing pass
infeed angle
thread pitch
F: 3 places after decimal point
E: 5 places after decimal point
n~~ber of chasing passes
depth of thread
I: taper of taper thread
J: angle input for taper-thread
coordinates of thread end point in
absolute or· incremental dimension

l"t"t
-----f :=~tart
end po~nt
p01nt Application:
I If The cycle 686 is used for
•t producing face threads.
t
Prerequisite is a spindle
speed (G97 s ... ) on the
main spindle and a feed
(pitch) in mn/rev (G95).
The control automatically
divides the individual
cuts on the basis of the
thread depth programned
under Kand the number of
passes programmed under H.
thread · For this division, the
last infeed (programmed
L..--en_d_p_o,_·n_t4-:-f6»-••--• ';il under the address D) is
taken into consideration.
With the value programmed
PO<G8602 under address A the in-
feed can take place in
the cycle at an angle up
to the max. flank angle.

4.40 PRAL04.94
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 PrograD1)1ing technique II
Threading ~ycles

G78 .:zJW.. I•. K.• r

G78- Threading· cycle for special threads

thread pitch
F:·3 ..places after decimal point
E: 5 places.after decimal point
distance from start point
to chamfer start Z axis
distance· from chamfer.start
to chamfer end X axis
coordinates of target point in
absolute or Jncremental dimension

. Application:
The threading cycle 678 can
be used for external and
internal threads.
The control executes a
single cycle {pass). If sev-
eral passes are required, a
repeat cycle (681) can be .
programmed in the next block
after G78 (see page 4.28).
The infeed as well as the
number of passes are pro-
grammed in the G81 cycle.
By the instruction GBl,-the
thread chas1ng pass entered
in the 678 cycle is merely
offset (corrected) by the
corresponding infeed.
At the end of the thread, ------z-----1 . I
a run-out chamfer can be
activated by .programming
635
(TOOUPARAM • H7-Menue=
H3- Set Up 1# 11 und # 12).

04.94 PRAL 4.41

TX SF 1NC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Threading cycles

Possibilities for 678

G78 ·x.. .Z... I... K... F•••

G78 X... Z... I... KO F•••

''"'"'°' G78 X...z... F•••

.'
Acme (trapezoidal) thread
GOO X26 210 MS
G78 X19.5 Z-33 F4 =
G81 U-0.2 H10
G26 M9

...
.,,,.,,,

4.42 PRAL04.94
. TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progril!lllling technique II
Threading cycles

G82- Threading cycle for taps

or cutting dies

G82 ·- F.. S ..

rrindle speed
thread pitch*
depth of cut in
absolute or incremental dimension
* Depending on pitch and spindle speed, the
feed rate must be up to 10 I less than the
pitch {extension of too.lholder).
Application:
The threading cycle G82 '
can be used for tapping
or threading by means of - - - d r ; J Hng depth --~1
taps and dies. start point

Prerequisite is a spindle
speed {G97 S••• ) on. the
c:::• I;._...:_~~~~~~~--~-:~= ti:oint---
-:.: _· l/1 ~~ rrrrrrrr\ I
main spindle and a feed
rate (pitch) in mm/rev
{G95). .• -
•
. •
-··..• ~- .
•
i
·t...J
I z---- 1

I.
overrun travel
(depends On spindle
speed and thread pitch)

NS G97 S30O TSOS M3 cc ~

GO XO ZSMS .L---4-----,t..t-~ i
GB2 Z-10 F1.1 :.
G26 Ms

Caution: 16

This cycle DDJSt not be used with

driven tools!

.. , 04.94 PRAL 4.43

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
[fRAUfJ. Progriillllling technique II
~ubroutine technique

Subroutine technique

G22 - Subroutine ca11-up

G22 A..

r t.,
P..O.. of '"=ssh,
subroutine repetitions
call-up of start block number
and end block number
subroutine call-up

For workpieces with identical program sections or

identical contour segments, these repetitious pro-
gram sections or contour segments can be programmed
as subroutines (e.g. recesses, parts families).
When required, they are called up in the main pro-
gram by a 622 instruction.
A determines which subroutine is to be called up
(see example 1).
If only the program section between two particular
block numbers (i.e. not the complete subroutine) is
to be called up in the subroutine designated with A,
it becomes operative by P and Q (see example 2).
Examples 2 and 3 show sections of the subroutine or
the main program (from No. P or up to No. Q}.
H determines how often the subroutine or the pro-
gram section is to be executed. If His not pro-
grammed, the subroutine becomes operative by G22
and is executed once (acts like Hl).
Note:
- Each program can be used as subroutine as long as·
it is clo.sed by M99.
- Subroutines can be nested up to eight times (see
example 6).

4.44 PRAL04.94
1X BF 1NC 30/42-65
 Progrilllllling technique II
. technique
Subroutine
.

Example l:
Main program Subroutine

G22 A8001
•
---------1'
I 08001

•
LM99

Example 2: Subroutine o.r

main program

:8002

G22 AB002
•
P100 0200 SL N100

•
L J200

•
•
M99· or M3o

Example 3: Subroutine
08003

•
P100
• N100
G22 A8003
•
• I
M99

04.94 PRAL 4.45

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 ' Progranming technique ·II
Subr(!utine technique

Example 4: Subroutine or
main program
--0504

G22 A504 0200 _ _ _ ___,

·-------------.
•
I.__ -
•
•
M99 or M30

Example 5:
Main program
•
G22 P100 0200 H3
•
•
N100
repeat three ·times
(H3)
N200

•
.•

Example 6:
G22A8006 - 08006
G22A8005 - - . 08005
G22A8007 - - . 08007

7-1 1·
M~M99
l
nesting max. 8 times

4.46 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . - - PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II._
Subroutine technique

Example: 622 A•••

Subroutine The same axial hole 0 11 mm and thread Ml2xl
are to be produced on several workpieces.
%
08000 A subroutine is programmed for these operations.
f. CENTER! NG). The subroutine must end with M99 = subroutine
N3 G97 S1 =1000 T303M3 end.
GO XO Z1 MS
G1 Z-6 F0.1
G25 11 M12x1
(DRILLING CORE HOLE)
N4 G97 S1 =1000 T404M3
GO XO Z1
G1 Z-25 F0-1
G25
(·TAPPING)
NS G97 S1 =400 T505M3
15
GO XO Z3
G82 Z-15 F0.9 25
G27 M99
%
Call-up in main program:
G22 ASOOO Example: 622 .•• Q••• H•••
When performing complete machining using
driven tools, it often happens that acer-
tain section of the main program must be
repeated.
~in program
%
0102
G59 XO 2150
•
•
N7 1'606 MS --- holes x 90°
G94 53=1000 M303 . hole circle 0 30 TTITI

.dri 11 ·speed 1000 rpm

GO X30 Z2M8
!illQ.
• . drilling
l hole and position-
• ing IJlilin spirrqJe
• by 90°
'-~200
l---G22 E1QQ. 0200 i-13

•
•
M30
%

04.94PRAL
4.47
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 ProgrilllJJling technique II
S~broutine technique

Generic subroutines

General
The subroutines described so far are prograllllled with
definite numerical values {e.g. 20 rran thread depth or.·
hole circle 0 30 rran}.
It is also possible to omit such numerical values and
to determine them for each individual case when calling
up the subtoutine.
Subroutines where certain values are not fixed, are
called GENERIC SUBROUTINES.
Instead of numerical values, parameter from the L para-
meter memory are used. Prior to calling up the subroutine,
these L parameters are replaced by the correct numerical
values •
.The following parameters are available:
LOI to LSD
LlOl to LI50.

For several subsystems please note:

Here, each subsystem itself has the parameters LIOI to
LI50 which can be called up by the respective subsystem.
Consequently, LIOI to LlSO exist twice {$1 and $2}. All
subsystems have access to the parameters LOI to L50.
The generic subroutine is called up by 622 A•••
Prior to this, the values must be assigned to the para-
meters in the main program:
Ll = 20 value assignment
L2 = 25 value assignment
622 A••• subroutine call-up
The parameters can also be combined with each other
by calculation functions:
L2 = [!.1 + 5] {see calculation functions} •

. 4.48 PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Subroutine technique

Instructions for creating a generic subroutine

1. Replace the variable dimensions of the workpiece
drawing with L parameters {see example).
2. If the feed rate and the cutting speed are also
variable {different materials), substitute here,
too, L parameters. This creates a parameter list
(see example).
3. Program the workpiece using these parameters.
This creates a generic subroutine {see example).
4. Before calling up this generic {sub-) program,
assign the specific values to the individual
L parameters in the main program (see example).
5. Check this parameter a~signment after the first
test run.

Note:

- If the values are to be calculated by the control,

they must be put in square brackets (see calcula-
tion functions).

04.94PRAL 4.49
lX SF 1NC 30/42-65
 Prograuming technique II
Subroutine technique

Workpiece with parameters

Parameter list
L1 - core hole diameter
L2 = thread diameter
L3 = thread length
L4 = drilling length
LS= thread pitch
L4 F'04UP01

Generic subroutine Call-up and value assignment in main program

%
0123
% G59 XO 2150
08007
(.CENTERING) •
N3 G97 V30 Xl2 T303
•
•
M3 MAIN PROGRAM
GO XO 21 MS •
G1 Z-[l2/2] F0.1
•
G25
(DRILLING CORE HOLE)
•
,L1 = 11 The value assignment
N4 G97 V30 XL1 T404 L2 =12 must take place be~
M3 L3 = 15 fore the subroutine
GO XO 21 L4 =25 call-up.·
G1
G25
Z-L4 F0.1 L5 =,
G22 A8007 SUBROUTINE CALL-UP
(TAPPING) •
N5 G97 S1 - 300 T505 •
M3 •
GO XO 23 M30
G82 ZL3 F{L5 ·o.9J %
G4 X0.5
G27 M99
o/o

PRAL04.94
4.50
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
Subroutine technique·

. .
Survey: Calculation, jump and comparison functions
~ Instruction Sy,:i,ol Meaning ,Exaq,le
Bracket open ( . onlv for text (dril 1.inal
Bracket closed ) onlv for text Cthreadi no l
Square bracket ocen r . for calculations r l
Sauare bracket closed l
.
. for calculations. r l
+· + . addition L1=f5 + 31
- - l subtraction L2=f3-1,5l
X * : multiolication L3=f4 • 0,51
I : division L4=f12/31
Sin& SIN • sine L5=S1Nf20l
Cosine cos cosine L6=COSf20l
Tangent TAN tangent L7=TANl15l
. Arc tangent.. ATN . inverse tangent L8 =ATNf151/f20l
Squar~ root SOR • square root L9=SQRl251
. Round RND • round L10=RND[L21
Round dorm FIX . round down L11 =FIXfL61
Round up. FUP . round· up. L12=FUPIL81
.Jump GOTO _unconditiona].jnmn GOTO SO
ru= if •••. IF ::.:cahdi tlOnil 1 jump IF[L...l GOTO 5
Equals EC '. comparison = IF[L1] EQL2
GOTOS
Not equal to NE • ·comparison IF[L1] NEL2
"' GOTO30
-

l~--·
cre'ater than GT ' comparison > IF[L2] GTL4
GOTO1
LT .. · ·comparison < IF[L3] LT1,2
I . GOTO25
..
Equal tO or greater tha~ GE r c.ompari son 2' IF[L6] GEL9
GOTO55
Equal to or less than LE 1
comparison :s IF[L3] LELS
I GOTO22
Alarm No~ l - 9 ERR alarm dis.play ERR2

Note: Example: The work sequence T202 in the pro~

- If values are to be gram is to be skipped.
calculated by the
control, these cal-
culation operations •
must be put in square •
GOTOS0
·brackets.·
G96 V200 T202 M4
- With the jump func- •
tion GOTO it is pos- •
sible to jump in a G26
block designated NSO
with N. G97 S1 =1000 T303 M3
•
•
·· 04.94PRAL 4.51
1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
Subroutine.technique

G201-G299- Macro call-up·

With the instructions 6201 to 6299 it is possible to activate
a certain work sequence as simply as a cycle. This "definite
work sequence" is programmed as a generic subroutine; its
values are defined (as in a cycle) by the addresses A to Z,
e.g. 6201 A•• B•• C•• (for possible addresses see table).
Macros are used where standard sequences are repeated with
different dimensions (e.g. bar stop, gauging, recessing, etc.).
By the macro call-up the control automatically activates the
pertinent subroutine.
In this subroutine the control does not operate with the
addresses A to Z, but with the pertinent L parameters L501
to L522 (see table).
For the connection between macro call-up and the appropriate
subroutine please refer to the diagram shown below!

Connection of macro call-up

and applicable_subroutine

Macro ca 11 ~up
in main program Subroutine . Address Parameter
A L501
• B L502
•
G231 A.. B.. C.. - - - - - 09831
C L503
D L504
•
•
•
M30
LML E
F
H
I
L505
L506
L507
L508

~2 §TI ------O98@Il
J
K
M
L509
L51_0
L511
-
G2~ - - - - - - 098 I@ p L512
G2§ - - - - - - 0 9 8 § a L513
R L514
G2~ - - - - - - O 9 8 [ggj s L515
T L516
u L517
V L518
Note: w L519
X L520
- Since macros have already been created or y L521
are being established by TRAUB, only the z L522
call-ups 6251 to 6299 are available for the
customers. Addresses 6-L-N-O are
not possible.

4.52 PRAL04.95
1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Programning technique II
Subroutine technique

Instructions for creating a macro

l. Replace the variable dimensions of the workpiece
drawing with the addresses A to Z.
2. Program the workpiece using these addresses. This
results in a program concept with which the con-
trol is, however; not yet able to work.
3. Replace the addresses A to Zin this program con-
cept with the pertinent parameters L501 to L522.
4. Write at the program start a subroutine number
from 9851 to 9899 and at the program end M99.
This results in a generic subroutine.
5. Call up this generic subroutine by means of the
macro instructions 6251 to 6299 with the addresses
A to Z (see example).
Note:
- With enough practice and expe~ience it is possible
to skip step 2 (= program concept).
- The addresses 6 (like 6 function), L (like para-
meter), N (like block number) and O (like program),
must not be used.
Example: Recessing tplunge-cutting)
6248 S•• X•• Z •• B•• D•• F•• W•• T ••
Sequence: 1st cutting edge T
1. Recess centre
2. Recess left I I
3. Recess right I
~- 2 3. ---l
I \
I \
\
I ,I .• __.\
_J___..,._ '
I
o.s : /
'fl- /////////,
s
S= start diameter I
X= target point dia. .w
Z= target point length 2
B= width (slot). .
D= chamfer
F= feed rate (mm/rev)
W= tool width
T= tool ATC left
X
z
I
Workpiece with addresses A to Z

04.94 PRAL 4.53

. TI< BF TNC 30/42-65
 PrograDITiing technique II
Subroutine technique

Program concept Generic subroutine with L501 to L522

with addresses A to z %
T[T] 09848
Z-[.Z: [B-W]] TL516
.
GO
2 GO Z-[L522-[L502-L519]/2]
GO X[S+2] GO X[L515+2]
G1 X[X+0,1] F[F] G1 X[L520+0.1 ]FL506
GO X [S+1] GO X[L515+ 1]
GO Z- [Z+D+0,5+0,7] GO Z-[L522+L504+0.5+0. 7]
G1 Z - [Z] D[D+0,5] E[F/2] G1 Z-L522 D[L504+0.5] E[L506/2]
. G1 X[X] G1 XL520
. G1 Z- [Z-0,1] G1 Z-[L522-0.1]
GO X[S+1] GO X[L515+1]
T[T+2020] T[L516+2020]
GO Z - [2-B-D-0,5-0,7] GO Z-[L522-L502-L504-0.5-0.7]
G1 Z - [2-B] D[D+0,5] G1 Z-[L522-L502] D[L504+0.5]
G1 X[X] G1 XL520
T[T] TL516
: G1 Z- [Z-0,5] G1 Z-[L522-0.5]
GO X[S+2] GO X[L515+2]
M99
%

Caution:
Max. 20 macro elements are permitted with the TX BF control system.
Example: L503=~ 11 J.5Q1: J.5Q1l±l!.5Q2:!.5Q211
31111111111111 = 16 elements :
Call-up in main program
I%
G59 XOZ130

Main .program 55
4 40
(RECESSING). all edges_broken
N4 G96V100 T404 M4 MS
0,5x45°
(1st recess)
G248 S30 X20 Z15 B4 D0.5 F0.1 W3 T404
G0X52
(2nd reces_s)
G248 S50 X40 Z40 B4 D0.5 F0.1 W3 T404
GOX52
(3rd recess)
G248 S50 X40 Z55 B4 D0.5 F0.1 W3 T404
G26M9 :2nd recess
'3rd recess
! M30 P04UP02

04.95 PRAL
4.54 TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
ITRAUif]

04.94 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
4.55
 PrograR111ing technique II

Drive for tools

Machining with positioned main spindle

by means of driven tools

Tool parallel to main spindle

It is possib1e to machine ho1es and threads para11e1 to
the main spind1e.
Face s1ots can be mi11ed using end mi11s.
By means of the numerica11y contro11ed C axis various
dri11ing patterns can be produced on the face, as shown
in the fo11owing i11ustrations.

Application:
Dri11ing, tapping, s1ot
mi11ing in Z direction.
Too1 axis inside and out-
side X-Z p1ane of the ·
machine.

Tool at radial position to main spindle

P1ain and tapped ho1es can be produced.
With end mi11s, s1ots can be mi11ed par-
allel to the axis of rotation.
In connection with the numerically con-
trolled C axis it is possible to produce
cross holes at various spacings.

Application:
Drilling, tapping, slot
milling in X direction.
Tool axis inside and out-
side X-Z plane of the
machine.

4.56 PRAL04.94
TX SF 1NC 30/42-65
 Progrilllllli-ng technique II

Tool at an angle to main spindle

(angle adjustable)
Holes, thread and slots can be produced by
means of swivel-type holders. Their axis can
be set to any desired angle in the X and Z
axis of the machine.
Application:
Drilling, tapping, slot
milling at an angle to
the X and Z axis. Tool
axis inside and outside
X-2 plane of the machine.

Milling with·sawblades or side-and-face cutters

Slots can be machined with sawblades in straight
milling or plunge milling operations. In combi-
nation with the numerically controlled C axis
polygon flats can be produced; efficiency ca~ be
increased by using paired cutter blades. Simul-
taneous X and Z movement enables machining of
s 1ots with curved bottom;

Radial slotting with

side-and-face cutter

-Jlr-~--
. ~

Milling of flats and

slots with side-and-
face cutters (straight
mil 1ing)

Milling of flats and

slots with side-and-
face cutters (plunge
milling)

04.94PRAL 4.57
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Programming technique II

Machining on position-controlled and

speed-controlled main spindle (C axis)
Milling with end mills
Slots parallel to the spindle axis, slots on faces and
outside the X-Z plane can be produced using end mills.
With the necessary additional equipment, also circum-
ferential and helical-shaped slots can be milled by inter-
polation of C axis and Z axis, and spiral-shaped slots
can be cut by interpolation of C axis and X axis. More-
over, key faces can be produced with plain milling cutters
(see also chapters 'C axis' and 'TRAUB-POLYFORM').

Application:· ·

0
r= _
4±lJII Circumferential face slots,
spiral grooves, polygon
milling with end mill

Circumferential, longitudinal
and helical-shaped groove
milling with end mill

Polygon milling with side-

and-face cutter

4.58 PRAL04.94
1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II

Progranming instructions for driven tools

Survey of driving possibilities

.Tool carrier Wl
------ ----------
S3 = 1000 M304

M4

M4

8-----0---~ ----
-~--~

1-------"

-~--~
Opposed spindle
S2 = 1000 M204
Main spindle
S1 = 1000 M4

M4

°(ool carrier W2
S4=1000 M404
. . . -.

04.95' PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4.59
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II

Driven tools can be mounted .in each of the 12 tool ·

stations, with one exception:
- If the machine is provided with an in-process
gauging control, station 11 of the tool carrier:
·fil cannot be equipped with driven ·too1s. · ·

Call-up in NC program

Tool carrier Wl ·Tool carrier W2

Spindle speed S3= ••• S4 ~ ..•
n =
max 10 000 ~
Cloc;kwise
rotation: M303 M403
Counter-clock-
wise rotation: M304 M404

Drives off M305 M405

Determining the spindle speed

- Caution:
When determining the spindle speed, a transmission
ratio must be taken into account for several tool-
holders (see toolholder catalogue).

Determining the direction of rotation

- The direction of rotation of the driven tools is
viewed from the tool drive.
· Caution:
For some toolholders (for driven tools) the direc-
tion of-rotation is reversed by an intermediate
pinion in the holder.
For the direction of rotation to be progranmed,
therefore, refer to the corresponding toolholder
catalogue.

Important:
Prior to the T call-up, the tool drive must be
switched OFF!

4.60 PRALQ4.95
1X SF TNC 3Q/42-65
 Prograiiining technique II fiRAUtfl
:Example .for calling up a driven tool:
.Tool carrier Wl in $1 .Tool carrier W2 in $2
N6 T606 M5/M205 N6 TBOB M5/M205
G94 G94
S3 = 1500 M303/M304 54=1500 . M403/M404
• •
• •
•
M305
•
M405

Tapping/threading {taps~ dies}*

When cutting threads by means of driven tools
with the main spindle being stopped, the thread
must be programmed in 601 format.
Example: Cross hole and cross thread,
pitch 1.0
GO X50 Z-20
clockwise rotation
M303 S3=300 (reversal of spindle rotation)
G1 U-15 F270** thread cutting
G1 . U15 F300 M304 thread return and
change of direction of rotation

T4 T6

Y = 20• / • ln
V = B• / • ln
F" = 0.06 /rp -·....
. -.,,1-,,-1 F" = 1.0 pitch

4x on circumference

* Transmission ratio of tool must be taken into account!

** The feed rate is calculated from spindle speed x pitch - 10 %.

04.94PRAL 4.61
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Programming techniq~e_II

4.62 , PRAL04.94
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
·· -Progranlliing technique II

Progranming example
for driven tools
Plunge-milling of flats

Transmission ratio:
see toolholder catalogue

C i T10
i
V = 10 a m/min
F = O. 001 lllllftooth
-- i
. . -

Approximate data for cutting speed and

feed rate: see table in toolholder catalogue
feed rate !liTl/min
Feed/tooth = spindle speed rpm ·•x number of teeth

N10{MILLING OF FLAT)
T1010 MS
G94 feed mm/min, drive ON,
S3=936 M303 clockwise rotation
for i = 2.34:l - 400 rpm
on circular saw blade
GO Z1
Go X20 M8
G1 Z-10 F35 milling, feed mm/min
(F' •ic s)
G4 X0.5 dwell 0.5 s
G1 Z1 F100
G26M305 M9 tool drive OFF
G95 feed mm/rev

04.94 PRAL 4.63

TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II

04.94 PRAL
4.64
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 ProgFa~ing technique II

c·axis

C axis instructions

G2S x. ..z... t
G28- Reference point C axis

input CO

Goo - Rapid traverse

Goo X/U .. :ztw... t
rotary motion of C axis
in absolute or incremental
di mens ion (in degrees)·

~---r T
G01 - ·Feed rate
G01 F...

feed rate in mm/min

rotary motion of C axis

in absolHte or incremental
dimension (in degrees)

G59 - Zero point shift

G59 X.. .z... C ...

'
zero point shift
of C axis

By using the C axis, drilling and milling

operations can be performed (positioned on
the workpiece) in addition to turning opera-
tions.
The traverse movement of the C axis is pro-
grammed under the address C.

04.94 PRAL 4.65

lX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II

The C axes of the main spind1e and opposed spind1e

can be se1ected both in the s1ide $1 program and the
s1ide $2 program.
Before se1ecting the G axis, the niain spindle or opposed
spindle.must have been stopped by means of M5 and M205,
respective1y, and G97 must be activated.
- During the C axis mode, no M05· / M205 and no speed
Sl .= I S2 = must be programmed.

The C axis of the main spind1e· is

- activated by Ml? and
- deactivated by Ml8.

In case of machines with abso1ute -measuring system, the

C axis reference point is approached with the function M17.
The function G28 CO is used within a C axis machining
operation to approach the C axis reference point.
If the C axis is to be se1ected without reference point,
Ml? Ml27 must be used (must be programmed in one block).

The C axis of the opposed spind1e is

- activated by M217 and
- deactivated by M218.

In case of machines with absolute measuring system, the

G axis reference point is approached with the function M217.
The function.G28 CO is used within a C axis machining
operation to approach the C axis reference point.
If the C axis is to be se1ected without reference point,
M217 M227 must be used (must be programmed in one b1ock).

Caution: These functions must be entered in a separate b1ock.

4.66. 04.95 PRAL

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 PrograDllling technique II

Absolute/ incremental prograDllling

Angle programming of the C axis can take place in absolute
(G90) or incremental (G91) dimension.
If the positioning or traverse movement of the C axis is
to be incremental, the C axis is pos.itioned or traversed
from the respective position in C+ or C- direction.

Zero point shift

If a C axis machining operation is to be carried out in
precise angle position to a preceding machining operation,
a zero point shift can be programmed with G59 C•• The
zero point shift can be in C+ or C- direction.
The zero point shift can be made in absolute (G90) or
incremental (G91) dimension.
After the zero point shift G59 C•. the C axis must be
traversed to its new zero point by GO CO.
The programmed zero point shift· can only be modified by
programming a new zero point shift. At the end o·f the C axis
machining operation it is, therefore, necessary to reset the
zero point shift by G59 CO.

Feed rate
The t'eed rate is programmed in mm/min. It is, therefore,
necessary to switch on the feed unit mm/min with the G94
.command.
If the feed rate is to be programmed again in mm/rev., G94
must be reset by means of G95.
Caution: When traversing at feed rate, the feed rate for
the C axis must be converted to "degrees per minute". The
macro G261 can be used for this purpose.

04.95 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4.67
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Prograrraning technique II

A macro is available for the feed calculations

of traverse movements with the C axis (not POLY-
FORM). In this macro (6261) ·the feed rate is cal-•
culated, taking into account the machining dia-
meter and the number of degrees to be traversed.
Within the machining program, the feed rate stored
in parameter L3 or L4 can be programmed under the
address F.
L3 = feed rate calculation with unit ( /min) 0

L4 = feed rate calculation with unit (mm/min)

Macro:
%
09861
L3 = FUP [360fll.504 * 3.14)) * [L.506 * l522* L502)]
L4 = FUP [L.506 * L522 * L502]
M99
%

Application in main program (only C axis):

697 T303. M5 ·
M17

G94
G90
. G261 8 ... D.•. F ••. z... macro ca 11-up*
for feed rate calculation
GOO x... z... c...
G01 x... F •..
G01 c... FL3 C axis feed rate value
from ..~11.r!lmeter L3
G01 Z-••. FL4 linear feed rate from
parameter L4
• •
•
•

* B = milling cutter speed

D = machining diameter
.f_= _feed .r.ate. in .mm/tooth
z = number of teeth of milling cutter

! 4.68. 04.95 PRAL

TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II

C axis selection on main spindle

Absolute programming
697 T•.. MS spindle stop
M17 C axis ON with·
approach to reference point C axis
690 selection absolute programming
694 feed rate mm/min
0

0
workpiece program
0

695
M18 C axis OFF

Incremental programming (with reference point)

697 T ... MS spindle stop
M17 C axis ON with
approach to reference point C axis
691 selection incremental programming
694 feed rate mm/min
0

0
workpiece program
0

690 . selection absolute programming

695
M18 C axis OFF

Incremental programming (without reference point)

·.
697 T ••• MS spindle stop
M17 M127 C axis ON without reference point
691 selection incremental programming
694 feed rate mm/min
0

0
workpiece program
0

690 selection absolute pr.ogramming

695
M18 C axis OFF

Caution: When programming Ml7, G97 must be operative.

04.95 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
: 4.69
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
ITRAu©· Programming technique II

Progra111Tiing examples

-- i

12

Positioning the C axis

on main spindle in $1
G97 T606 M5 tool call-up, spindle stop
M303 S3=1500 direction of rotation,
speed of driven tool
M17 C axis clutch ON
G91 selection incremental programming
G94 feed rate mm/min
GO Z3
GO XlO MS positioning to pitch circle dia.
Gl Z-12 FIDO
GO Z3
GO C120 positioning by 120°
Gl Z-12
GO Z3
GO Cl20 positioning by 120°
Gl Z-12
GO Z3
G26 M9 M305 approaching tool changing point
rot. tool drive OFF
G90
G95
Ml8 C axis clutch OFF

4.70 PRAL 04.95

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 ,
Programming technique II

P05AS10

Milling on the face

on main spindle in $1
G97 T606 M5 tool call-up, spindle stop
M303 S3=1500 direction of rotation,
speed of driven tool
M17 C axis clutch ON
G91 selection incremental programming
G94 . feed rate mm/min
G261 B1500 050 macro ca 11-up
F0.02 Z3 for feed rate calculation
GO Z3 positioning to
GO X6 MS milling diameter
Gl Z-3 FlOO
Gl C90 FL3 traverse movement C axis,
feed rate from macro calculation
GO Z3
G26 M305 M9 approaching tool changing point
rot. tool drive OFF
G90
G95
M18 C axis clutch OFF
Note:
- The centre point of an arc to be milled
must lie on the spindle centre line.

04.95 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4.71
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II

Positioning the C axis with G22 subroutine call-up

on main spindle in $1
G97 T606 MS tool call-up, spindle stop
M303 S3=1500 direction of rotation,
speed of driven tool
Ml7 ·c ax·is clutch ON ·
G91 selection incremental programming
G94 feed rate mm/min
GO Z3
GO XlO \l'i8 . positioning to pitch circle diq.
NlOO Gl Z-12 FlOO
GO Z3
N200 GO C120 positioning .by 120 °
G22 PlOO Q200 H2
0

G26 \l'i9 M305 approaching tool c~anging poi.nt

rot. tool drive OFF
G90
G95
M18 C axis clutch OFF

04.95 PRAL
4.72 i TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Progranming technique II
ITRAUl,1
••~~waB1L••w•••••1111•~,mraa1Bn11

04.94
TX PRAL 3.!'!0""'/"!"42 -"!'65"""'"_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SF TNC 11111 4.73'
 Options

Options

02.95 PRAL.,....,. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
111111111111 5.1
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options

02 .. 95. PRAL
5.2 I
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Options

Contents

Y axis 5.5
fliain planes 5.6

Synchronization 5.13

·Opposed spindle 5.18

Rear-end machining on opposed spindle 5.19
Bar feeding 5.21
Z~ro point shift GPs· (opposed spindle) and pick-up position 5.22
Pu11 ing forward and _p.ar'ting-off position
fer opposed sp:ind1 e- 5.23
Worki ng position on opposed· spindle 5.24

Workpiece sor.ter TNC 30 5.26

Workpiece sorter TNC 42/65 5.28

TRAUB-POLYFORM 5.31
Gl6 - Plane circumference 5.33
Gl7 - Plane face/transv. cut 5.35
Gl9 - Plane _chordal flat/.1ongitudina1 -cut 5.38

Milling cutter r_adius · compensation (MRC) 5.41

Characteri sties of mi 11 ing ciitter radius compe·nsation 5.43
Programming examples: Activation and
deactivation of milling cutter radius compensation 5.44

Gl4/Gl5 Synchronized cut 5.48

G310 Cross function 5.49

02;95 PRAL 3!1!0!11!/""42"'-"'5""5_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

TX 8F TNC
5.3,
 Options

02.95 PRAL
5.4 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Y axis fiRAUlf]

Y axis

1. Description
1.1 Application
The Y axis is used
- for off-centre drilling and milling operations
on·a workpiece;
- machining takes place as with the X and Z axis;
- for setting the tools to the axis of rotation.

1.2 Characteristics
- The Y axis is vertical to the X/Z plane;
- it is located in the tool carrier Wl;
- the traverse travel is +18/-18 (+35/-35) mm from
the axis of rotation;
- it can be interpolated at choice with another axis.

2. PrograDllling
- All traverse movements exec~ted by the X and Z axes
can also be performed by the Y axis. The G instruc-
tions are then enlarged by the Y input address.
- Transition elements can be programmed.

2.1 Angles, circular arcs and

milling cutter radius compensation· (MRC)
- A main plane must be determined for programming
angles and circular arcs.
- Within the plane selection it is also possible
to program transition elements.
- A main plane is formed by two axes, with the
third axis being the infeed axis.
- The main plane is also to be selected when work-
ing with the MRC.

02. SF
95 TNC
PRAL 30/42-65
...~ ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5.5
TX
 3. Main planes
3.1 Plane G17 - Face/transverse cut
The main plane is determined by the X and Y axes, i.e. the Z axis
is the infeed axis. If an angle or a circular arc is programmed
after selecting G17, the following systems of coordinates are
valid for angle programming and determination of the centre of
circle. After the G17 selection the X axis remains related to
the diameter.

- - - · · · · - - - - - - - - --------- -- - - -A+- - - - J+
9CT

.
<

i
i ~tart point start point

181T IT P- P+ I- I+

270" A- J-
Y-

. 3.2 Plane G19 - Chordal flat/longitudinal cut

The main plane is determined by the Zand Y axes, i.e. the X axis
is the infeed axis. If an angle or a circular arc is programmed
after selecting G19, the following systems of coordinates are
valid for angle programming and determination of the centre of
circle. After the G19 selection the X axis remains related to
the diameter.
Caution:
The direction for the Y axis is modified as com-
pared with G17.

-------
r- ,... A-

z-- . E . - . -----3 Z+
... 0- Q+ K- K+

r+ . A+ J+

5.6 02.95 PRAL

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Y axis

4. Absolute or incremental
- After selectiong G91 all programmed traverse
movements of the Y axis are incremental.
- Resetting takes place by G90.
- G90 is the switching-on condition.

5. Compensation with the Y axis

G41
- Milling cutter radius compensation ON.
Tool to the left of the contour as seen in
traverse direction.

----- ----~-
- - ..,
'
+ . Q-

02.95
TX PRAL 3!11!!01!1/4!!1!2""-""65_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SF TNC S.7
ITRAUif] Options
Y axis

G42
- Milling cutter radius compensation ON.
- Tool to the right of the contour as seen in
traverse direction.

-----------------------·------------------.

•- • I

- The milling cutter radius compensation (MRC) is

called up by the instruction G41 or G42.
- If the MRC is activated, the drawing dimensions
can be programmed directly.
- The tools must be measured on the centre line
(clocked out). PO must be entered as quadrant.

02.95 PRAL
5.8 TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Y axis
.-wa::·;;;·;;;;;_ ;;;-~;·J•1e;-,.="~,BI-E#iP'41f.i•L•IA.f'MI•
5.1 Activating the milling cutter radius compensation
- Before selecting the milling cutter radius com-
pensation position the tool in GO in front of the
workpiece, related to the milling cutter centre
and with safety distance.
- After the G41/G42 call-up of the MRC, the compen-
sation is carried out in GO to a point on the.milling
cutter circumference vertical to the next traverse
movement.

_
No traverse movement takes place.
- ........ Example:
/ ------- --· --- -
Y+
/
T808M5

/
'Go S3=1500 M303
/ G90G94
M17
X+ G0X42Y0
G0Z-5
G17
G42
G0X42Y-5
30 10
G1 X30
1 G1 Y15
Y-

02.95 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
L 5.9
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Y axis

5.2 Deactivating •the milling cutter radius compensation

- After the iast traverse movement the deactivation
is executed in GO so that no traverse movement takes
place.
- The last traverse direction must be programmed as
an angle. Use the respective system of coordinates.
- Program the point of the axis that is vertical to
the last traverse movement, related to the milling
cutter centre.
- Then deactivate with G40.

Example: _.,
---
G1 Y .. .
-·------·-
G1 X .. .
G1 Y1
G0A90X40
GO
G40
G0Z5
x- ' . -
~
X+

M18
G90G95 A90
-
~

30 10
Y-

5.10 02.95 PRAL

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Y axis

· Progranming example Y axis - 617

- - - - - · - - - - -----·-·-------
-------·· 17
14

,,.1/ -.....,_"

RE? LO
1/ N

/
% 0112( )( )( )0
$1
N9M5T909
M303 S3=1500
G90G94
M17
GOZ-5Y-15
GOX27
G17
G42
GOX17Y-15
G1 A90F80
G2 X14 YO P26 AO
G2P26AO
G1 X17Y15A270
G0X27 A90
G40
G0C180
G41
GOX17Y15
G1 A270
G3X14 YO P26AO
G3P26AO
G1 X17Y-15A90
GOX32A270
G40
GOX25
GOYO
G18
G95
G26
M30

02.95
TX PRAL~----------------------
SF TNC 30/42-65
5.11
 Options
Y axis

Programming example Y axis - Gl9

A-B
-----
25 .
225 17
,... ....L 1

- ---- I
· - · -H- +·
'
I,
I
----- 4

&-

0111( )( )( )0
$1
G0Z-26.5Y-2.5
N8M5T808
G1Z-22.5
M303S3aa1500
G1Y-5
G90G94
G3Z-30.5Y-5R4
M17
G1Z-47.5YOR4
G0Z-42.5Y15M8
G1Y5
G0X17
G3Z-39.5Y5R4
G1Y-15F100
G1Z-22.5Y0R4
G0W7.5
G1Y-5.05
G1Y15
G0Z-25A180
G0Z-27.5
G40
G1Y-15
G0X25
G0X25
G0Y0
G0YO
G18
G24
G95
T909
G26M9
G0Z-26.5Y-5
M30
G0X18
· G1X14F60
G19
G41

02.95 PRAL
5.12 TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Synchronization

Synchronization

· Notes on the synchronization of a multi-slide program

A twin-slide machine comprises two subsystems:
Subsystem $1 and subsystem $2
- In the subsystem $1, the axes of the first turret
Xl, Zl, Cl, Vl, Yl must be programmed.
- In the subsystem $2, the axes of the second turret
X2, Z2, C2 m_ust be programmed.

When programming, no difference is made between the axes

of the first and of the second turret. The subsystem in
which programming takes place determines which slide or
turret responds.

This results in two programs which must be established·

separately. If the two slides operate independently of
each other, the two programs can also run separately.

Caution: The zero point shift of the individual axes must

be programmed in the respective subsystem program.

02.95 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5.13
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
;...
 Options
Synchronization

Basic rules:
If the programs for machining are to be run in parallel, the
individual subsystem programs must be synchronized by means
of START and STOP characters so that possible collisions are
avoided and utmost overlapping of the machining times of both
slides is achieved.

A 11
! 11 is programmed as START an STOP character.
- The exclamation point must be written as a separate pro-
gram block. As re-entering possibility and for more clear-
ness, the 11 ! 11 can be written with a block number, e.g.
NlOOl ! .

- A synchronization character can mean both START and STOP.

- Both subsystem programs must contain the same number of
synchronization characters. That means that if a 11 ! 11 is
programmed in one subsystem, a 11 ! 11 must also be programmed
in the other subsystem, in accordance with the synchronization
plan.
- Before the end of the program (M30 or GOTO ... ) both subsystem
programs must contain a 11 ! 11 for balancing purposes so that
both subsystem programs skip back simultaneously to the pro-
gram start.

02. 95 P.RAL
5.14
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Synchronization

Synchronization plan
In order to optimally synchronize a twin-slide program,
a synchronization or machining plan should be prepared.
Based on the drawing, the following points must be taken
into consideration:
0
Which operations are necessary?
0
Which tools are required to execute these operations?
0
How is the turret equipped (collision risks, sequence
of operations)?
0
Which operations can be performed in parallel by both
slides and which ones must be executed separately?

This results in a machining or synchronization plan.

Example:

54
3 21
~

18
16
27 9
v1.5

'¢ 0
--r- :r=.-:-.·::::.-::::::.':--,;. - " lf/4 ~-- o:d ~ CD
N
- ~

"'
CD
.a:J__
I
I
~====== __;
I
I i"
1,
''i'
!~- - t - -
~

-
11
16
B
M6
-
2x45°

02.95 PRAL ~~'!"!'1------------------

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
5.15
 Options
Synchronization

Synchronization plan

T11 _Facing/roug~i_ng HSP T1 Facing/roughing GSP HSP = main spindle

GSP = opposed spindle
T2 Ffnjshing··HSP T2 Finishing GSP

T3
' T3 R~Cessing 60° HSP Centering GSP

T4 Centering HSP T4 ,Drilling D 6.8

TS Ori 11 i ng HSP TS Tapping MB GSP

.c axi,s activation HSP 17 ·Part removal

T6 Cross centering"HSP

17 Cross drilling.D 6.8

TS, Tapping MB
T9 Keyway•:milling with Y axis

•~C axis deaCti'Vation

Representation of sequence on time graph

Slide 1

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 17 TS T9 T10 .

™WJ~@~~~~~~ time (sec)

10 )30 loo lso 1120

~~~~~ ~
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 17

_Slide 2

02.95 PRAL
5.16
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
Options
Synchronization

Additional synchronization variants in the program

Example:
Machining with slide $1 on the C axis of the opposed spindle

The headlines of the 2 subsystems

are read in simultaneously.

G59XOZ ••• As no machining takes place in

subsystem $2, it immediately
G97 TBOB M205 reads a 11 !" which means STOP $2.
S3=1500 M303
G90G94
M217
GOX30Z5 MB
G1 Z-10F100
GOZ5

When subsystem $1 reads a 11 !"

wh~le $2 is in waiting position,

When subsystem $1 reads a"!" GO C120

while $2 works, this means
STOP $1.
When subsystem $2 reads a"!"
while $1 is in waiting position,
this means START $1 and $2.

G1 Z-10 F100 When subsystem $2 reads a 11 !"

while $1 works, this means
GOZ5 STOP $2.
When subsystem $1 reads a 11 ! 11
while $2 is in waiting position,
this means START $1 and $2.

When subsystem $1 reads a 11 ! 11 GO C120

while $2 works, this means
STOP 1.
When subsystem $2 reads a"!"
while $1 is in waiting position,
.this means START $1 and $2.
When subsystem $2 reads a 11 ! 11
G1 Z-10 F100 while $1 works, this means
GOZ5 STOP $2.
When subsystem $1 reads a "!"
while $2 is in wa-iting position,
this means START $1 and $2.

G90G95 M218
G26 M305 M9

Caution:
This example only serves to demonstrate the synchronization!

02.95 PRAL 30/42-65

------------------------- 5.17
TX 8F TNC
 Options
Opposed spindle

Opposed spindle
The performance of the opposed spindle matches that
of the main spindle, including the separate C axis,
so that the same machining possibilities exist on
both spindles.
In addition, a separately controlled axis (V axis)
allows linear traversing of the opposed spindle, thus
enabling
- picking up the workpiece at the main spindle and
- if necessary, pulling the bar forward by a certain
length into the working area and
- steadying long, slender shaft-type workpieces.
After the workpiece has been taken over by the opposed
spindle, machining can continue simultaneously on the
main spindle (twin-spindle operation).
A pneumatically operated ejector ejects the finished
part from the opposed spindle.

02. 95. PRAL

5.18 F TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Opposed spindle

Rear-end machining on opposed spindle

As a rule, the following applies when progranming the
opposed spindle:
The V axis is programmed in subsystem 1 ($1); the follow-
ing traverse movements are allowed: GOO·, GOl, G53.
For workpiece .machining the opposed spindle must be in
its rearmost end position:
V = 370 (TNC 30),
V = up to 720 (TNC 42/65).
The machining program is programmed in subsystem 1 ($1)
or subsystem 2 ($2);
- so is the C axis.
- The spindle speed can be determined at choice in sub-
system 1 ($1) or subsystem 2 ($2) by
~ S2 = ••• (max. 7000 rpm).

Important:
- In order to enable a feed rate calculation in nm/rev
. (G95) when working with the opposed spindle speed,
G64 (C axis rotary encoder ON) must be programmed be-
fore the first traverse movement in feed F.
Resetting take·s place by G63.

02.95 PRAL ~30~/"!!'4~2-"!!6'!!'5_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

TX SF TNC 5.19
 Options
Opposed spindle

When progranming the opposed spindle, the following

M functions must be taken into account:

Function M instruction

Direction of
rotation clockwise M2O3
counter-clockwise M2O4
opposed spindle STOP M2O5
Work-holding
equipment clamp workpiece M210
release workpiece M211
chuck open w. opposed
spindle rotating M277
M277 function OFF M278
Synchronous
running with reduced ON M237
reduced synchronous 100 % M238
torque synchronous OFF,
spindle STOP M239
Ejector forward with time-
Jimited blow-cleaning M294
only blow-cleaning M295
blow-cleaning OFF M296

Important:
- Before selecting M237, the speed limitation must be
programmed both for the main spindle and the opposed
spindle:
0
G92 s ... (= modal for main spindle)
0
G64 (selection opposed spindle)
0
G92 S... (limitation opposed spindle}.

5.20 02.95 PRAL

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
Options
Opposed spindle

Bar feeding
Rear-end machining of the workpiece on the opposed spindle
can be performed in parallel to machining a part on the
main spindle, provided, however, that after the part has
been transferred to the opposed spindle, the bar stock is
fed out or pulled forward through the main spindle into
the working area.
Two possibilities for bar feeding exist on the TNC:
1. Feeding to stop
The bar stop _in the tool carrier swivels into working
position and the bar is fed out by the bar loading
magazine.
2. Pulling forward by means of the opposed spindle
When picking up the workpiece, the opposed spindle pulls
the bar (before parting off) out of the main spindle so
that direct machining of the next component is possible
without feeding to the stop.

Important:
- Risk of collision!
The parting-off tool must already have been moved to
its parting-off position (close to the main spindle)
before the opposed spindle starts its pick-up movement.

02.95 PRAL
TX SF TNC-"'3~Q~4!'!!zl"'_5!"!!"'------------------ : 5.21
 Options
Opposed spindle

Zero point shift (opposed spindle)

and pick-up position

G59 Zaxis
I
FH
' I/
0
I/
--
- I

\
~

'

...,
- - . - ,_ -- . - -
-~ ---
r-...

~ C-
I
' I/
' "
G59 V axis .

Pick-up position
Zero point shift opposed spindle= zero point
shift main spindle+ chuck height opposed spindle
Pick-up position= front edge of workpiece - clamping length

02.95 PRAL
5.22
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Opposed spindle

Pulling forward and parting-off position

for opposed spindle

-----------------------
----- -------------
I
- ' - - B
/
- I

- ~

~
-- ~ --
~ f---
~ - f--

I - V
'
- I

G59 z axis
-- ·--• - •c ••
T

Zero point shift main spindle G59

Width of parting-off tool B = 3 mm
Facing allowance front + = 0.5 mm
Parting-off position = 3.5 mm

Workpiece length T
Width of parting-off tool + B
Facing allowance front +
Facing allowance rear +
To be pulled forward by N

02.95 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5.23
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Opposed spindle

Working position on opposed spindle

Working position opposed spindle

T
0

FH
Position of opposed spindle

G53 V position V
Height of chuck FH
Clamping length (T minus U) ( T-U)

Working position G59 Z

02.95 PRAL
5.24
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Opposed spindle

Prograrrnning example
~
15 -------
4F
---~ 40 I I

~'--~ - -

- -·- ~- .L ' - - - - ~ ~~ . - . -- .

- '~
65
70 69

__P_ic_ki~g_up and partin-"g'--o_ff________

$1 $2
G59 XO 285 V100 G59X02330
G26 G26
I·

(Parting-off tool _~XL..

G02-... M,/L
. (Picking up)
M237
G90 G94 M77 M277
G97 S1=200 M3 M211
GOV5M295
G1 V-40 F3000
M210M296
G4X0.5 ,,
i
M11
G4X0.5
B044069
G1 V29 F9000 M278
M10G95
G97 S1 =3500 M3
G4X0.5
M238
GO X25 23.5 M78
G1 X-1 FD.OS
GOV34W02
G53 X240 V370
I M239
;. G26M9
. !
M30 M30

02.95 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
TX SF TNC 30/42-65 5.25
 Options
Opposed spindle

Workpiece sorter TNC 30

Workpiece removal from opposed spindle
1. Sorting from opposed spindle
I , - • - - - - - - - - - - - - - • •

653 z....

-
·- '1.1- -- '-·
I
C :)
"- - -
... 0
"'
C!]

-- - -
Collecting tray
short/long

G26 M205 approaching tool changing point

and stopping opposed spindle
T606* calling up tool station that houses
collecting tray of workpiece sorter
G53 Z320/Z284** displacing collecting tray to
opposed spindle in Z direttion
G53 Xl20/Xl20** displacing collecting tray to
opposed spindle in X direction
M211 opening clamping of opposed spindle
M294 ejector forward, ejecting part and
blow-cleaning spindle
G4 Xl dwell "l:> can be optimized
G53 X240 approaching end position of tool
carrier jn X direction
G25 Prior to indexing, the tool carrier
must be traversed to a position where
collision-free indexing is ensured.

* The collecting tray can be mounted in any desired

tool station of the W2.
** Caution: The positions in X and Z direction must be determined
once in advance in set-up mode (using the handwheel),
in accordance with the dimensions of the collecting
tray (short: 95 mm, long: 200 mm).

02.95 PRAL
5.26 · TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Opposed spindle

2. siecting workpiece on to conveyor belt

653 z....

0 M_94/M9S

:-conveyor belt--1:::::__ __J

Collecting tray
short/long
T808 swivelling tray to intermediate position
;;,, the tool station that is 2 stations behind
the collecting tray, is called up
T{collecting tray + 2) = T intermediate position
Caution: Risk of collision with main spindle!

653 11',8/252* moving collecting tray to ejecting position

M94 opening workpiece sorter and reducing turret
indexing speed
TllOO swivelling collecting tray to workpiece sorter
> the·tool station that is 5 stations behind
the collecting tray, is called up
T( collectfog tray + s) = Tejecting position

64 Xl dwell ,.. can be optimized

M95 closing .workpiece sorter and resetting
turret indexing speed to 100 %

* Caution: The positions in X and Z direction must be deter-

mined once in advance in set-up mode (using the
handwheel), in ·accordance with the dimensions of
the collecting tray (short: 95 mm, long: 200 mm).

02.95 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5.27
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Opposed spindle

Workpiece sorter TNC 42/65

Workpiece removal from opposed spindle
1. Sorting from opposed spindle
-----
653 z....

I
-
r ·- ..U-1 -- L...

.....,
C :)
I-
-
In
C!l
0
-- --
Gripper device

.G26 approaching tool changing point

G97 M2O5 T5O5* stopping opposed spindle and calling up
tool station that houses collecting tray
G94 of workpiece sorter
M63 opening gripper
G53 z. -* displacing gripper to pick-up position
G53 Xl52 displacing collecting tray to
opposed spindle in X direction
M62 closing gripper
M211 opening clamping of opposed spindle
G4 XO.5 dwe 11 a;. can be optimized
Gl W•• F3OOO pulling workpiece out of spindle
(clamping length+ safety distance)
G53 X4OO approaching end position of tool carrier
in X direction
G25 Prior to indexing, the tool carrier must
be traversed to a position where collision-
free indexing is ensured.

* The positi'on must be determined in set-up operation.

02.95 PRAL
TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Opposed spindle

2. Ejecting workpiece on to conveyor belt

--------- ---
I '- -
'
~-- - ,,__
G53 Z••••

..... ...
-.
r

;;,
'-
l- '
()
...
C ")
I
I
0
M94/M95 i

-..... conveyor belt

Collecting tray
short/long
TlOl · swivelling tray to ejecting position
:>the tool station opposite the
gripper is called up
Caution: Risk of collision
with main spindle!

G53 Z •• moving collecting tray to

ejecting position*
M94 opening workpiece sorter
M63 opening gripper
G4 Xl dwell =>can be optimized
M95 closing workpiece sorter
G95

* Caution: The ejecting position in Z direction must be

determined in set-up mode using the handwheel.

02.95 PRAL_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ ... -

:-.... , _,...,_.. '

5.29
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Opposed spindle

5;30 02.95 PRAL

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
Options
TRAUB-POLY FORM

TRAUB •.POLYFORM

TRAUB-POLYFORM instructions

610-Milling function OFF

.

Ttrtstractio,
.

610

. Ts_
B instruction
no input

611-Milling function ON
611

TT
s.J:,stmtio,,
B instruction
no input

69D-Absolute input, C axis and Y axis·

690
s... Te
... T .
T
• no input
M 1nstruct1on
B instruction

G91-lricrementa1 input, C axis and Y axis

G!il1

TI
S • Xnstruction
B instruction
no input

02.95 PRAL 5.31

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
ttRAUiJ_ Options
TRAUB-POLYFQRf,I

With the additional software·TRAUB-POLYFORM {option)

switching from turning operations to milling opera-
tions is possible by the instruction 611.
Before selecting the milling function {611). the follow-
ing conditions must be met:
- A traverse moveme~t must have taken place in the
X and Z axes; ·
- the reference point of the C axis must have been
approached;
- an existing zero point shift in the X axis must have
been deactivated by G59 XO;
-·the 694 feed rate must be programmed in Dill/min.

After selection of 611, a milling plane must be pro-

grammed:
- 616 milling plane circumference
- 617 milling plane face/transverse cut
- 619 milling plane chordal flat/longitudinal cut.
By programming 611 and subsequently selecting the
plane, all traverse movements are entered in Dill
{instead of angle degrees C).
All geometry functions from 601, 602/603 can be used
during TRAUB-POLYFORM.
For an incremental traverse motion, 691 must be pro-
grammed first.
This causes the value entered under the address Y to
be carried out incrementally.
Ggo (absolute selection) deactivates G91.

Caution:
-
The first traverse movement must be programmed in absolute.

5.32 02.95 PRAL

....·-
<

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
Options
TRAUB-POLY FORM

G16 - Mi Tl ing ·plarie circumference

616- Milling plane circumference

616 B... M ...

I Mjlnstruction
B ins,truction
no input

180° . A- J-

.,___1
.l . ~,.,m ___t. ~;.,m
270° 900 Q- Q+ K- l K+
00 A+ J+
Z- Z+ The instruction 616 selects the circumferential
plane. Programming of the traverse movements is
carried out under the addresses Y and Z.

Y-
d<1t A movement in the X axis (infeed) must be pro-
-4-..--,-..--___.i- ~ - ! - grammed as separate block. The X value approached
Iv :, IAJ--Q~ before selecting Gl6 is used to calculate the
J.:. A circumference. After selection of 616, the fo11ow-
Y+ ing G functions are pennissible:
! z • GOO, 601, 602, 603, G04, G09, 622, G40,
641, 642, 683, 684, 690, G91 and macro call-up.
Within 616 all geometry inputs like 601, G02/G03
616 - Plane are possible.
circumference
02.95 PRAL 5.33
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
TRAUB-POLYFORM

Example:
Machining diameter: 27

NS TSOS MS
G94
M17
M304 S3 :1000
G28 co
G59 co
N100
GO 24
GO co
GO X28 MS
G11
G16
GO Y35
t G1
G2
A180 FSOO
Z-8 YO 046 AO
Y- G1 :X35
G10
N200
G59 C120
G22 P100 Q200
Y+
G59 C240
G22 P100 Q200
G26 M305 M9
M18
G95

5.34 .-------------------~= 0?.95 PRAL

1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
TRAUB-POLYFORM

G17 • Milling plane face/transverse cut

G17- Milling plane face/transverse cut

617

rs._ r Mtstructfo,
B instruction
no input

90° A+ J+

lbrt
l ~·- P- P+ 1-
lbrt '"'"'
I+
180°

270°
0°

A-
l
J-
Y+ The instruction 617 selects the plane face/trans-
verse cut. Programming of the traverse movements
takes place under the-addresses Y and X.

A movement in the Z axis (infeed) must be pro-•

x.-~p-+....!....-~----+-:.x+ grammed as separate block. After selection of
i--x 7
,:-.: .•• :·· G17, the following G functions are permissible:
1 . GOO, GOl, G02, G03,· G04, G09, G22, G40,
G41, 642, G83, 684, 690, 691 and macro call-up .
. Within G17 all geometry inputs like GOl, G04fG03
are possible.
Y-

02.95 PRAL
TX SF 1NC 30/42-65
 Options
TRAUB-POLYFORM

Example:

N9 T9O9 MS
G94
M17
M303 S3 =600
G28 co
G9O
GO X46 Z-3
G11
G17
G3 X19,621 Y12 PO AO
F1000
G1 X-2O F100
G10
GO X60
G26 M3O5
M18
P05AS10 G95

~J2.95 PRAL
5.36 TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
Options
TRAUB-POLYFOl!M

Example:

N3 T303 MS
G94 .....
M17
M303 S3=500
G2BCO
G90
GO Z-5
GO X33.5
G11
G17
G3 X-11.15Y12.5 PO AO FlOOO

G1 X-12.5 F100
G1 Y-12.5
G1 X12.5
G1 YB
G10
GO X60
G26M305
M18
G95

+X

16.75

MILLING CUTTER RADIUS 5 MM

"'"''""'

Q4_.)J5 _PRAL 5.37

1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
;J:RAUB-POLYFORM

G19- Milling plane chordal ·flat/longitudinal cut

r.
G15- Milling plane chordal flat/longitudinal cut

G15· rs
... re...
M instruction
B instruction
no input

I
i ,,,
j,,,.
,,,.-,,,.j
/ i

Z- Z+
'
180° A- J-
::.fahM1J~~m-~.tw.~:~?::Zwt:~-
MNMMVif1filtn~ww~. "" ·t
" :;
...._._
y.
t
+ a. +a.
..,_._
t
t
270°
start
· point

90° K-
enrl point
K+
Y+
oo A+ J+
""5AS23

The instruction 619 selects the plane longitudinal cut.

Caution: ~~;.-

- This plane can only be applied if one face

already exists. Ir' -·

- to milling cutter radius compensation can be

used in this plane.

Programming of the traverse movements takes place

under the addresses Y and Z.

5.38 02.95 PRAL

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
Option~
TRAUB-POLY FORM

A movement in the X axis (infeed} must be pro-

grarrmed as separate block.
The tool is positioned at right angle to the
spindle -centre; therefore;- eccentric cross holes
are only possible by means of adjustable tool-
holders.
After selecting Gl9, the following 6 functions
are permissible:
GOO, 601, 602, 603, 604, 609, 622, 640,
G41, 642, 683, 684, 690, ~91 and macro call-up.
Within 618 all geometry inputs like GOl, 602/603
are possible.

02.95 PRAL 5.39

1X BF 1NC 30/42-65
lfRAUwJ Options
TRAUB-POLYFORM

5.40 · 02.95 PRAL

TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
Options
Milling cutter radius compensation

Milling cutter radius compensation (MRC)

Instructions for milling
cutter radius compensation

G4q_-Millingrcutter radius compensation OFF

. .li' ':' J
G40 b t M-j···
-,
instruction
B instruction
no inPl!:t

G41-Milling cutter radius compensation ON

G41

T :~~struct;,,
B instruction
no input

EXTERNAL MACHINING INTERNAL MACHINING

-.

02.95 PRAL 5.41

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
HRAUfl . Options
Milling.cutt<'r radius compensation

G42-Milling cutter radius compensation ON

Tool in traverse direction right of contour

G42

.r_ r.tstructfo,
B instruction
no input

EXTERNAL MACHINING INTERNAL MACHINING

. _.,., -·
·);.:;"
-~----· .
.....;;._..,,,.__-_:·_. . _ ..--';J'-,t\ ·~-; . .
:·: ·._ ·:_f.:~.:~=-:;~:
. . .... .-:-
.·.
: .;-~ -::..:-~·: ..--.·~ -·
.. . .. - ·...
_. --:- ...

- -· '-: -.: . ·. ..- ~.

.:..- -·. :. :. .~t:--..
;

. . . --- : .
t .. -·' .
The milling cutter radius compensation is called
up by the instruction 641 or 642.
If the milling cutter radius compensation is ac-
tivated, the dimensions entered in the drawing
can be used directly for program creation, with-
out a machining allowance.
The data required for the geometric calculations
(cutter radius R, position of radius centre P)
are stored in the·tool memory.
All milling tools must be clocked out (T.I.R.).
The quadrant PO (zero) must be entered for all
milling tools . . . ::.:.:. , . ~:f·~~:. •-..
After sele_ction of the milling cutter radius com-
pensation, the control system has automatically

Tz..
access to these tool data.
~
I cutter rad1Us
"F _Extract tra, tool data file

quadrant always 0
coordinates of tool related
to tool reference point
tool station

PRAL 02.9~
5.42 1X SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Milling cutter radius compensation

Characteristics of milling
cutter radius compensation

Note:
- As long as 641 or 642 is active, at least three
of five consecutive blocks must be traverse 1110ve-
ments.

- As long as 641 or 642 is active, the following

G instructions are pennissible:
GOO, GOl, 602, 603, 604 ·and 609.
- The first traverse block after selecting 641 or
642 must be programmed as straight line (GOO/GOl).

Caution:
- If an inadmissible G function is called up, the
machine is stopped and an alann is displayed on
the CRT (screen).

Activation and deactivation of

milling cutter radius compensation
The activation of the milling cutter radius compen-
sation is followed by an approach motion at rapid
traverse (GOO).
The end point is approached already in compensated
mode since the control calculates the equidistant
path with the following contour element (see activa-
tion of milling cutter radius compensation). A. com-
pensation after activating the milling cutter radius
compensation is only possible if a traverse movement
has been programmed within the selected plane.

Caution:
- A block in the third axis is interpreted by the
milling cutter radius compensation as block
without traverse movement.

02.95 PRAL .Ji,43

1X BF TNC 30/42-65 ·
 Options
Milling. cutter radius compensation

Program11ing examples:
Activation and deactivation of
milling cutter radius compensation (MRC}
•
+Y •
•
T1212 MS
G94
M17
M303 S3 =80
G28 co
-x +X GO
GO
210
X90 21
G1 2-4 F100
G11
G17
G42 MRC ON
G1 Y10 F100
G1 X17.S
G1 Y17.S
G1 X-17.5
min.

-
2x milling cutter radius

•
+Y
•
•
T1212 MS
G94
M17

-X +X
M304
G28
GO
S3 =80
co
210
-
GO X90 21
G1 2-4 F100
G11 G17
G42 MRC ON
G1 X17.S F100
G1 Y17.S
G1 X-17.5

5.44, PRAL 02:95

1X 8F TNC 30/42-65
 . .
Ootions·
Milling cutter radius compensation

•
•
• f-
I
15

G1
G1
Y10
X15 ..
G1 Y40
GO X2.5 A!!IJ
G40 MRC OFF
.-II
.
30

_._ ______
'\
10

- i 20
-~• +X

+Y

• ..' . GOO •

• .' I movement

• •

I
G1 Y10
G1 X15
G1
GO
Y40
X25
~-----.. \
G40 ·MRC OFF I
- - • +X
~

\
• \
•
•
G1 Y10 -.----- '\
G1 X15
G1 Y40 I
G40 MRC OFF

02.95 PRAL 5.45

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Milling cutter radius compensation

NS T303 MS
MSOS SS =1000
M17
G2B co
"' G90
GO X52 Z-4
G11
G17
G42 MRC ON
GO X21 YO
GS PO AO · F100
G1 XO vs AO RB
G1 Y2S
GO X5 A90
G40 MRC OFF.
G10
G26
M17

RllASJ2

•
•
•
GO X52 Z-4
G11
G17
GS X2S.S1S Y10
PO AO F1000
G42 MRC ON
GO X2S.S1S vs
G1 XO RB F100
G1 Y2S
GO X5 A90
G40 MRC OFF
G10
G26
M1B

•·
5.46 PRAL0Z.95
1X SF TNC 30/42-65
-
-
 Options
Milling cutter radius compensation

Behaviour during
milling cutter radius compensation

By reading five blocks

ahead while the milling
cutter radius compensa-
tion is operative, the
control (through calcu-
lation of the equidis-
tant intersection
points) automatically
ignores a contour that
cannot be executed cor-
rectly with the milling
cutter radius.
While these blocks are
being processed, the ·,
control displays the
alarm "SKIP BLOCK" on
."\
the screen. Machining i
continues, however. I
Note: ~-
There must be no
"SKIP BLOCK" imme-
diately ahead of
640.

02.95 PRAL 5.47

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
Synchronized cut

614/615 Synchronized cut

614 Synchronized cut OFF

614 B••• M•••

I ' M instruction
B instruction

615 Syncrhonized cut ON

615 B... M•••

I, . ~struction
B instruction

r ..., .
]
--- ---

,
~
Application
- The Gl5 instruction is required in the roughing cycles G71,
G72 and G73 to enable the tool carriers Wl and W2 to cut.
evenly on the workpiece.
- The traverse movements programmed in $1 and $2 must be iden-
tical; when working with cycles, it is, therefore, recommended
to store the contour description in a subroutine.

02. 95 PRAL
5.48 TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
6310 Cross function

6310 Cross function

Macro for the cross function of the C axes

Explanation
In basic setting of the machine, the C axis of the main spindle
is generally assigned to subsystem·!, and the C axis of the
opposed spindle to subsystem 2. Due to this permanent assign-
ment, the respective C axis must also be programmed in the cor-
responding subsystem program.
If with subsystem 1 a C axis machining operation is to be ex-.
ecuted on the opposed spindle, the permanent assignment can be
cance 11 ed by means of the cross function for the duration of the
machining operation. Thus, the C axis of the opposed spindle can
be programmed 'in subsystem 1.

Application
The call-up of the cross function 6310 must be read -synchronously
in both subsystems. With the address C then indicate the C axis
which will be assigned to the respective subsystem.
For example, program: in $1 6310 C2 and in $2 6310 Cl.

Caution:
It is absolutely necessary that the cross command 6310 is followed
by a tool call-up as the 6310 call-up deletes the actual tool data.

6310 programming example:

$1 $2
Machining Machining
0 0

0 0

!
6310 C2 6310 Cl
T •••• T ••••

After machining, the crossed C axes must be reset by programming

the 6310 call-up together with the basic setting.
$1 $2
0 0

0 0

! !
6310 Cl 6310 C2
T. ••• T. •••
02.95 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5.49
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Options
6310 Cross function

Pennanent assignment of the axes in subsystem 1 and subsystem 2

Subsystem $1
Subsyste;-$1 -7
I
Xl axis I
Zl axis I
Cl axis I
Vl axis V
I
Yl axis

Subsystem $2

X2 axis
Z2 axis
C2 axis

Modified assignment by crossing the C axis

After the G310 crossing coD111and the modified assignment will
shown in the "Monitor" picture.

$1 $2
0 4711 No-o o· 4711 N0-0
UP 0 8001 N o-o UP 0 8001 N o-o
[G54.: Position] [Restweg] [Masch.pas.] [G54.: Position] [Restweg] [Masch.pas.]
Xl 0.000 0.000 0.000 Xl 0.000 0.000 0.000

Vl 0.000 0.000 0.000 Vl 0.000 0.000 0.000

Yl 0,000 a.coo 0.000 Y1 0.000 0.000 0.000
FC 0.000 FC 0.000
S1 0( 0) T 0 S1 0( 0) T 0
S2 O{ 0) M S2 0( 0) M
S3 0 M S3 0 M
S4 0 M S4 0 M
8 8
N1005! N1005!
G310C2 G310C1
G97 S1=1500 T101 M3

•
G97 S1=1500 T101 M3

liiiiilil,illlililll lliifttl1ilillil l{lll'llililill\lll

HO H1 H2 H3 H4 HS H6 H7

5.50 02.95 PRAL

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
Setting up

Contents Chapter.Page

Starting the machine 10.7

Basic settings .8
Key switch positions .8
Selector switch positions .8
Activating and deactivating subsystems .8
CRT (screen) mode .9
Selecting functions and axes on CRT (screen) .9

Approaching the reference point 10.11

Traversing slide - spindle 10.14

- by means of feed keys· - · .15
- by means of pulse generator (handwheel) .15

Tool carrier (turret) indexing 10.17

Automatic mode 10.20

Testing the program in automatic mode .23

MDI mode 10.24

Tool data 10.26

Input by means of ATC method (Automatic Tool Control) .26

Setting barriers 10.28

02".95
10. l
TX SF
 Setting up

Machine control panel

1 INPUT (parallel key on NC panel)

2 Cursor down --{parallel key on NC panel)
3 Cursor up (parallel key on NC·panel)
4 Cursor left (parallel key on NC panel)
5 Cursor right (parallel key on NC panel)
6 Selection
7 Menu control key left (parallel key on NC panel)
8 Menu control key right (parallel key on NC panel)
9 Coolant pump ON/OFF
10 Steady ON/OFF
11 Message steady closed
12 Chip conveyor ON/OFF
13 Work-holding equipment of opposed spindle ON/OFF
14 Message work-holding equipment of opposed spindle closed
15 Activation/deactivation of rear-end working
16 Message tailstock quill clamped
17 Tailstock quill ON/OFF
18 Handling system (FHS or IHS) ON/OFF
19 Message ~ark-holding equipment of main spindle closed
20 Closing of work-holding equipment (set-up operation)
21 Opening of work-holding equipment (set-up operation)
22 Bar feeding in bar loading magazine ON/OFF
23 no function
24 no function
25 NC for FH5 ON/OFF
26 Direction keys for bar feeding (pos. 26 towards main spindle,
pos. 27 in oppo~ite direction); key pas. 49 must be set to
27 "Bar feeding".
- Selection of all key functions of the softkey bar pos. 52.
Key pos. 65 (NC panel) must have been selected. Key pos. 49
must be set to "set-up (JOG) mode".
28 Dr.ives OFF
29 Drives ON
30 NC ON
31 NC OFF
32 Subsystem 5 ON/OFF
33 Subsystem 4 ON/OFF
34 Emergency STOP
35 Subsystem 3 ON/OFF
36 Subsystem 2 ON/OFF
37 Subsystem 1 ON/OFF
38 Automatic mode START
39 Automat;c.mode STOP
40 Main spindle override switch
41 Automatic run ON/OFF (after end of pro~ram~ the program must
not be restarted by key pos. 38)
42 Skip blocks ON/OFF
43 Playback ON/OFF
44 Feed override switch
45 no function
46 no function
47 Single block mode ON/OFF
48 Rapid traverse override switch

10.2 PRAL 02.95

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

49 Mode selector switch Q} = automatic mode el.pulse gen. (handwheel)

~= MDI reference point
'fr
'1llo = set•up (JOG) __mode bar feeding in
.~bar loading magazine
50 no function
51 no function
52 Softkey bar
53 Key-oper~ted switch face driver 0 = OFF I= ON
54 Key-operated switch set·up (JOG) mode 0 = OFF I = ON
55 Key-operated switch memory 0 = LOCKED I = OPEN

10 12 14 16 18 20

1 23 4567 89 15 17 19 21 22 .23

24
25
26
27
28
29

30

31

. . •• ~-.-.~-·-" •. ··::,··,:· .. :·. :::: ; ·..•. :::-:-···.::··. ••. ·.-.·,.,.,•.·;;~:::.::-·;I.··.··:~·,:··-~:

I~tl ·'H1 U-'i-12! !:·H3[1'.i-lli!:V-Hs! !"'Hs!l' H1!,,
•• • ••••.'._.d •••• ,•..;,. • ••• • ::,••••• ,,.:;•••••••••••••;:, •• ,,,,,,,,,,,,, •••'••••• ..••'••••••••

32
001 oel o:u =2 3 33
I
34
35
36
37

55 53 43 42 41 40 39 38

46

02.95PRAL 10.3
TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

NC panel

56 Display of all current data (e.g. NC program, axis coordinates)

57 Input and modification of NC programs
58 Reading-in of NC programs (e.g. ·via punched tape, PC)
Output of NC programs (e.g. on to punched tape, printer, PC)
59 Input and modification of tool data and parameters
60 Input of NC instructions into MDI memory
61 Checking of axes and spindles as well as execution of diagnostics
62 Activation of graphic simulation
63 Activation of interactive programming system
64 Activation of terminal function (e.g. connection to an external computer)
65 PIC pictures with operator guidance (for set-up mode)
66 Storage of tool coordinates
67 Cursor left (parallel key on machine control panel}
68 Menu control key left (parallel key on machine control panel)
69 Resetting of NC
70 Cursor up (parallel key on machine control panel)
71 Cursor down (parallel key on machine control panel)
72 NC alarm (LED)
73 NC ready (LED)
74 Menu control key right (parallel key on machine control panel}
75 Cursor right (parallel key on machine control panel)

76 1st axis
77 2nd axis
78 3rd axis
79 4th axis
BO 5th axis

Bl Pulse generator (handwheel) Multiplier l increment on

(for pos. 48) pulse generator
1 0.001 mm
10 0.01 mn
100 0.1 mm

82 Optional stop MOl

83 Test run without axis movements
84 Test run: M, B, Sand T functions are not executed
85 Traverse movement of all NC axes
86 Rapid traverse: only in combination with the corresp. key, pas. 85
87 no function
88 no function
89 Keyboard for numerals, decimal characters and geometry elements
90 INPUT (parallel key on machine control panel)
91 Keyboard for characters, special symbols and keywords
92 Shifting upper-case/lower-case letters
93 SHIFT - If key pos. 92 is not selected, this key is used to activate
the' upper-case letters of keyqoard pos. 91.·
- If key pas. 92 is selected, this key is used. to activate the
keywords (on keys A - Z) of keyboard pos. 91.
- By pressing simultaneously this key and the corresponding keys
of the upper row of keys of keyboard pos. 91 or the keys of .
keyboard pos. 89, the second function of these keys is activated.
94 Control
95 Tabulator

·.._J'
10.4 PRAL-02.95
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 -_ Setting up

96 no function
97 ESC - es~ape
98 no function
99 Deletion of an input zone and return to beginning
100 Deletion of an input zone
107 Deletion of one character
102 Insertion of one character
103 Cancelling of-last input
104 no function

61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77
56 57 58 59 79 BO 81

82
83
84
99
98

97
96

95
94
93

92 91 , 90 89 88 87

0?_._9~PRAL 10.5
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

"J
10.6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PRAL.02.95
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

.Starting the machine

.1. Switch the main switch on the control

cabinet ON .

.2. Switch the NC control on the machine

control panel ON.

~- Switch the drives OFF to clear any

internal error messages.

4. Switch the drives ON.

cl] ol
5. Open/close sliding guard.
Check correct functioning of the door
switches by opening and closing the
sliding guard. Oply after the safety Open and close
devices have responded can the machine sliding guard!.
be started.

02.95PRAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.7
TX SF 1NC 30/42-65
ijRAUII] Setting up

~\\llilJ l&ll&AWl&Mla8&6iliiit:Ctf1t8111
1

.Basic settings

Key switch p~sitions

oe 1
1. Set-up mode ON.
0 2. Program memory open
(not necessary for all set-up functions).
001

0
Selector switch positions
1. Special functions
(switch position 1).

2. Override
2.1 Rapid traverse
The rapid traverse speed is specified in
per cent, i.e. 25 %, 50 % and 100 %.
During setting up, the rapid traverse
switch should be set to 25 %.
Caution:
No axis movements are possible if tne
rapid traverse switch is set to zero.
2.2 Feed rate
The white row of numbers specifies the
programmed feed rate in% in automatic
mode.
The green row of numbers specifies the
feed rate in mn/min.for all traverse
movements in set-up mode.
2.3 Spindle speed
The spindle speed defined in the NC pro-
gram (automatic mode) can be modified
in terms of percentage.

10.8 PRAL 02.95

TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

Activating and deactivating subsystems

Use the keys -e,->~I_'

on the machine control panel
to activate the required subsystems or the coumpound
slides Sl/S2 to be traversed.

CRT (screen} mode

Switching to the set-up function is possible from
all CRT pictures.
In the following CRT modes, direct setting-up can
be carried.out without switching:
FO PIC pictures with operator guidance MDNITDR
or
MONITOR picture for the display of the
current slide position
61
IDOL
PIIRIUI
or
TOOL/PARAM picture for defining the tool Ef]
and machine data.

Selecting functions and axes on CRT (screen} OJ

1. FO picture in the MACHINE function area: OJ
Move the cursor tci the required axis by
means of the arrow keys at the edge of
screen. - NC axis_-__ _

2. Direct axis selection by means of the X,

Y, Z, C, V keys on the NC control panel
related to the currently activated subsystem
Xl/X2, then Y, Zl/Z2 and C axis.
Thus direct axis selection is possible from
all CRT pictures.
tjepending on
equipment
assigned to
C ax s
Vax s
Y ax s

02.95. PRAL
10.9
TX 8F ---------------------
 Setting up

SYSTEM TX BF

CRT (screen) picture in modes

of operation: 1r~IF=1r.,,..,1[A111,.J[ I
FO
IIONITOR i_ --;, ; :·- ii) @ ~I C.]Q
TOOL/PARA
etc. ~ 0~7 @ ,- --;-·· ; 1"lIP1
~ ~-~ ml _ =-- :1 !>lei,
:1:r::_-;1
al a....?••...dl

lJ.-..!,,==========11 Lil
~uii]~[fil)LJi!l~~[fil].lfE>-1

001 oe1

00
=;===-=·=··==·=Lr:::mi~G!...="':::.i' r L!...!I
0 0 0

0 0 0

-
F7e::::;;;;;::::J
w=
- Nt axis ...
ITI0GJ0ul { r:
__,,... 5!. ......
··.__
\

' -- /
;·-- -- --· - · - ·-·1 ·..,...... __ ,,,..~
I I
I
I
I
________ J

r-·-,
'· -- ____;

10.10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PRAL 02.95

. TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

Approaching the reference point

Machines with TX BF control system have an
absolute measuring system; the reference point
must, therefore, only be approached after
"overload".

Before a program can be started or tools measured,

the machine reference point of all (affected) axes
must have been approached.

Prerequisite:
The machine must be switched-ON,
- the drives must be switched ON,·
- the key switch mus·t be set to set-up mode,
- the·subsystem must be activated.

I. Set the mode selector switch to the

reference point symbol.

--Ne: axis -
II • . Select the axis.
LiJ @~ LAJrn

~--1--,
n--·-
H .- ... r
---1

ll(•)I
2
l ..-'1----•;;'
'
:
,.,!...
''
__ .J
''
...J"I

.r, ............... -l
.'
f-L-..!
r
t-..:4 ~
X

- z

91020

02.95
TX BF PRAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.11
fiRAUtl Setting-up

III. Execute the traverse movement:

1. Tool carrier position on reference point
The tool carrier must first be moved away
from the reference point in JOG or manual
mode (see section 'Traversing slide').
"--1--,
::---- ---1
II11 / .- , ... ) I
'--t~
ll
'i.-.---
'
__ .JI
I

.l..,..-1,
: R :
J.-- .. - ...... .t
t N
r1.--
,._ I
-.. :. :
X

____,
z

91021

2. .Execute an axis movement by means of the feed

keys+ rapid traverse key on the NC control
panel.
Pay attention to the sequence:
First approach the reference point in X- di-
rection, then in Z- (and Y-) direction.

2.1 After reaching the reference point trip dog

of the corresponding axis, the rapid tra-
verse speed is reduced to the reference
point approach speed.
After the reference point has been reached,
its position is displayed on the CRT (screen).
Reference point position:
Zl - away from main spindle at
approx. Z = 250
Xl - up at approx. 0 X = 230
Yl - on Y = O
Z2 - away from main spindle at
approx. Z = 250
X2 - down at approx. 0 X = 230.

02.9,5 PRAL
10.12
TX SF
 Setting up

I SYSTEM TX SF
; ,;;~ _ ,..:._ __ <;.~I ___, / . _ ___I

OlT {screen) picture in

modes of operation:
IIONITOR
TOOL-PARA
FD [±) [iBi) ~~~lf,:\,7
[ii @ 1-mrni I ,g;rpl
F .. .;7
~ -·-.:... t1;;1! I NC oil NCI!
[I) ~ g;i!

Lil
'1---""====="""""-=====l ~
~ui!l~~~[fill~[fill lff>-!

o 01 oe1

®0
=:====-=•=•-===•=f 1 ·lr..~J fTJ-::;!
0 0 0

0 0 0

·"
_ --
...... -:; .....
·.
\
i
! 0 i
\ j
I -- -·--- ·- -, . ~ ....
I I
I
I
' -- - --·· ----· ___I
ij ·-· -- i ' --· --·.
'ii ........ ____ ) 1 -- .......!

02.9!iPRAL 10.13
1X BF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

.Caution:
oe1 - If the procedure described in III.l is not
observed, there is a risk that the axis will
0 contact the EMERGENCY STOP limitation.

Traversing slide - spindle

Prerequisite:
- The machine must be switched ON,
- the drives must be switched ON,
the key switch must be set to set-up mode,
the subsystem must be activated.

I. Set the mode selector switch to the

JOG symbol.

- NC axis -
II. Select the axis.

02.95 PRAL
10.14 TX SF
 Setting up ITRAUif]

The sliding guard must be closed!

By means of feed keys:

III. Execute the traverse movement:

1. Execute an axis movement by means of

the feed keys(+ rapid traverse key)
on the NC contra l .pane 1.
2. At the same time,. adjust the traverse
speed using the override switches.

The sliding guard may be open!

By means of pulse generator (handwheel):

IV. Execute the traverse movement:
1. Pulse generator (handwheel)
The pulse generator has 100 division
marks :per revolution and the di stance
the slide covers per division mark
depends on the position of the rapid
traverse switch. ·
2. Override
Rapid traverse from 1 - 100 (top row of
numbers): This scale specifies the factor
by which the division marks on the pulse
generator are multiplied:
1 x one division mark= 1 µm = 0.001 mm
10 x one division mark= 10 µm = 0.01 mm
C axis = 0.01°
100 x one division mark= lQ0 µm = 0.01 mm
C axis = 0.1°
Feed rate set to 100 %••
Max. feed rate with open
sliding guard = 1 m/min

02.95 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ ~

10.15 · ·
TX 8F

L_
 Setting up

SYSTEM TX BF
""iiWJ:ftiP 11.r• cllub EHt lHS lt1111E S.ruf•r IIJ•-•
l"-''"'""''"' '""::•::•';.:;":!'.<J'•::••,:•,:;•1,:.l..
="::'.::"::'':.:"'a:"::"':::''------'11 G
G
IT] ~ ~ i~ii:GJ[Q
~ [§] @ I ml I ,g;g,!
GI ~- ~ t ~! i NC ol! NC I !
[I] ~ fgjl
==~,r-.r:::-i,=,=~11 OJ
~uiilGill~C!i!l~Cfilluiil Ito-I
001

0 0
oer -:,- :< '
([j"•j
·,._.-
Cl>

'(9' •c-
·•:f"" ·~-

=·=·====-=··=·===·=rE{f.~ FD
0 0 0

0 0 0

.,,. . _.:-> .. -.........

•-o=
= __ _

\
:-, )
-------
-~
'·-......__
..... ___ .,.
/

l
i -·· -- -·· -· _.J
{ -----,
; -- . ---..'

10.16 PRAL02.95
TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Setti_ng up

Tool carrier (turret} indexing

P.rerequisite:
- The machine must be switched ON,- oe1
- the dr_ives must be switched ON,
- the key switch must be set to set-up mode·,
- a subsystem must be ·activated.

~- Set the mode selector switch to the

JOG symbol.

II. CRT mode:

Select

III. Tool carrier selection 1st dialogue _level:

Select the tool carrier Wl (turret} by tool carrier Wl
means of the softkey @and the tool
carrier W2 by the softkey @.
The CRT display· changes and new func-
tions are assigned to the softkey bar.

IV. Carry out indexing: 2nd dialogue level:

1. Softkey
locking.
i:ii1 for indexing with indexing
with locking
2. Execute indexing by means of the
I_ LIandC!::l.keys on the machine
control panel,

02.95PRAL _____- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.17

lX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 0-RAUi:l Setting up

Caution:
- Before leaving the FO picture it is absolutely
necessary to deactivate the "turret indexing"
function; i.e. if one of the two softkey func-
tions is still highlighted in light blue on the
screen,, deactivate it by press~ the softkey
· ijg (without locking) or till (with
locking). ·

MACHINE FEED EHS IHS AWUE . SPEC IAL ALARMS

/SET UP/ £0 /SYSTEM 1/ MANUAL TRAV. /DIRECTION KEYS .
,'

X1 0.000 +X1.,;,.J?z
21 0.000
V1 0.000 -21+•21
C1 0.000 -¥1 ,r- •¥1
-~.;;

-X1

II II II II 71 II I
91031

10.18 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PRAL lJ~.9!:i

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

-, I hM
SYSTEM TX 8F
,;... •
-Q ;;:.•~
I
G ir;:rum@J 11:MJ~D
~
@t=lt,gf lt.J. !LA.IL l
[±] ~ t·iiii ~,~H i.... u r.....i
GI Fel ~~I !...<!lXH:iJ I =I
Gl 1s-;;·1
.__::::_.. b. ;.:~l r:¥c11 NC I I
CTl ~ ~ g;if

OJ [@] @
[fill Ciiiluiil Cfill ~~ Cfil!Uf!J lrf>-1 "
l ~~ [TI]
001

© ©
o•t1 •) :} !

{f;\
'....::_,/
""-
1S·
I ml
u ,. ~i= ·(t} -i-- 'ilr..-1..½

-··= E LQJIE ml
;
I
• •

0 0 0

0 0 0

- NC axis -

Ei:; :: : 0000n

~,~~

._____, 8 I wl:::J ~

! i

02.95PRAL 10.19
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

Automatic mode
Prerequisite:
- The machine must be switched ON,
oe1 - the drives must be switched ON,
- the key switch must be set to set-up mode,
(!)
O •I - the key switch must be set to
PROGRAM MEMORY OPEN,

0 - a subsystem must be activated.

1..· Set the mode selector switch to the

AUTOMATIC symbol.

IIDXITOR I.I. CRT mode:

ts] Select

. III. Axis and spindle traverses:

l. With the override switches change

... the percentage of traversing speed
{%) and rotational speed(%) of
main spindle or opposed spindle in
.i~t. the selected program.
1-..'1W..-,,c 2. Also in the test runs without axis
movement the override ·switches must
not be set to zero.

10.20 PRAL 02.95

TX 8F TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

IV. Machine components

Make the.selection according to the set-
up procedure and the machine equipment.

l. Coolant pump ~

2. Chip conveyor ~ *

3. Steady ir;s)
4. Tailstock quill F<0l
5. Handling system ~

6. Bar feed/bar loading magazine E:iJ

V~ Program selection on CRT:
l. Press the softkey ~ SEARCH to
select the third monitor picture. 1st dialogue level:
SEARCH
MON!TOR/Zusatz MONITOR 3.1/2

MONITOR picture.3.1/1
Mel• r 960004220 22.6.91
Select the function
Schmied 960007543 13.4.91
Wemer 4.7.91 using softkey
H2 = SEARCH

ROY.
I

~ The chip conveyor can be stopped and restarted by means

of this key if M92 has been programmed previously.
Caution: '
After M30, the chip conveyor will restart from the pro-
gram block containing M92.

92_._9!;i PRAL 10.21

TX SF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting-up

2.1 Activating a complete program

Use the cursor to select a program in the
-2nd dialogue level basic picture.
Program active - Press the softkey PROGRAM ACTIVE to confirm
the selection.
An input window will be opened showing again
the selected program number for checking,
1 Reset but no further information is given.
EJ
__
Reset '

EJi
- Press key _,_, to enable the memory.
- Press key to activate the
program. . ~ot)"'"''
2nd dialogue level 2.2 Activati.ng a program section
Program active Use the cursor to select a program in the
basic picture.
- Press the softkey PROGRAM ACTIVE to confirm
the selection and enter in the open input
window the desired block number from where
the program is to _be activated.

I
:,::. ,:@!

, IAONITOR/Zusat,: MONITOR 3.1/2

Enter block No. and i
0:1815 Ch: 5 Schulungsteil Schmied 60007543 13.4.91
(if necessary) block !
group No. in the r NS (Bohren D6.2) .
dialogue window. I
G97 S 1=2000 T606 M3 I
Set up Search
G0Z2Y0
G0X0 MB 0 1815
G1 Z-15.2 F0.1 6
$1 N
G0Z2 B
G26M9 $2 N
'' N7 (Raeumen)
B
' M5 T707
.• $3 N
G94
' B
i
'. $4 N
~tuck- [1Ri:q,.j
.W.¥#:-:~:❖»':
Mes- I
B
$5 N
'

. By means of B (block group No.),.re-entering

a program can be shifted, if necessary, by a
certain number of program blocks.

10.22 PRAL 02. 95

TX SF
 Setting
- -
up
- ..

- Press the ·- EJ key to enab 1e _the memory. Reset

EJ
- Press the .lro.
...,,1 key to activate the
selected program sect1on.

Testing the program in automatic .mode

VI. Testing the program

The current X, Y, Z, C and V coordinates are dis-
played on the active half of the CRT.
hi! lw l.t: UP ,

1.1 Press the ~FID - -~F:::>

and keys on the
NC control panel to.activate a test run plus
without axis movement to have the cycles
and geometry functions checked by the
control. or
1.2 Press t h e ~ - key on the machine
control panel to activate/deactivate or
the skip blocks. ·

1.3 By pressing the ~ - key on the NC

control panel in combination with the
start key, only the currently active
program block will be run in single
block mode.

2. Key r CD! AUTOMATIC START

3. Key
r ml AUTOMATIC STOP

02,9_5PRAL 10.23
TX BF TNC 30/42-65
 Setting up

MDI mode
A set-up program containing max. 16 blocks can be
created in this mode of operation, e.g. for boring
chuck•jaws, for optimizing the cutting efficiency
or indexing a tool carrier, etc.

Prerequisite:
- The machine must be switched ON,
- the drives must be switched ON,
- the key switch must be set to set~up mode.
- The key switch must be set to
PROGRAM MEMORY OPEN. 0 I!!! I

- A subsystem must be activated.

- The reference points must have been approached
0
O•l
for the axis movements.
0
I. Set the mode selector switch to the
MDI* symbol.

II. CRT mode:

Select'

* Important: When leaving the MDI machine mode by means of

the selector switch, the set-up program entered
will be deleted.
02.95. PRAL
10.24
TX SF
 Setting up ITRAUif]

III. Program input:

Prerequisite:
The softkeys
§1 block operation
Jt2I . subsystem selection
)1sr call-up
~-- $ change
-~- format
~ .return

of the program editor are active.

l. The set-up program is programmed as de-

scribed in the chapters 'Editor ... ' and
'Programming technique I', etc., and the
MDI program must be activated.

2. By pressing the fl...l.J!, key, the set-up

program from the MD-I memory is immediately
run completely
or
in connection with the function,
block by block.

02.95 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
10.25
TX BF
ITRAUit) Setting up

Tool data

Input by means of the ATC (Automatic Tool

Control) method
oe1

Prerequisite:
- The machine must be switched ON,
0
- the drives must be switched ON,
- the key switch must be set to set-up mode. 0•1

0
- The key switch must be set to
PROGRAM MEMORY OPEN.

- A subsystem must be activated.

I. Set the mode selector switch to the

set-up (JOG) symbol.

II. CRT mode: TOOL

PARIIN

Activate the CRT mode TOOL/PARAM. Lf]

02.95 PRAL
10.26
TX SF
 Setting up

III. Opening the tool memory

By pressing softkey Hl TOOL DATA open the

tool memory for input of the measured data.

IWKZ-DATENI Werkzeug 2.1/3

•l:INC.•A:ABS.
•X• •Z• •Nose-R• ,p, IMC PosJ
., 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 Xt 0.000
•2· 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 Zt 0.000
•3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 Ct 0.000
•4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 Vt 0.000
•5 0,000 0.000 0.000 0

9l030

IV. Measuring the tool

1. Under#( ... ) call up the station with the Tool call-up:
tool to be measured and index the tool
carrier by pressing r1..ul. # ( ... ) and
2. Move the tool under the reticule of the
ATC microscope.
By pressing the ! ~ key activate the
1
3.
automatic data input in the TOOL PARA
picture. The following appears in the
bottom line of the CRT display:
- the tool number or station,
~ the X and Z values related to the tool
reference point.
4. If necessary, add in the input line the
values for
- the cutter radius (R)
- the quadrant (P)
by way of the keyboard.
# (l)X(B0.000) Z(50.000) R( ••• ) P( ••• )

5. · [E>-1 ', Store the tool data.

6. Move the tool carrier to a position that
allows collision-free indexing of the turret.

02.95 10.27
TX BF PRAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
 Setting up

Setting barriers

Prerequisites:
- The machine must be switched on, -·-------
- the drives must be switched on,
the key switch must be set to set-up mode. oel

0
- The key switch must be set to PROGRAM O•I
MEMORY OPEN.
0
- A subsystem must be activated.

- The reference point must have been

approached.
- The tool to.be used for approaching the
barrier points must have been measured.

I. CRT mode:
tO!IL • tout. .
Pl'IRAII • PAIIIIK •

~J Activate the CRT mode TOOL/PARAM.

Efl

02.95 PRAL
10.28
TX SF
 Setting up

II. Opening the input window:

Use the softkey H4 SET UP 2 to open
the input window.

!SET UP DATA 21 $1 Pani. 5

IMC Pos.J
·x1 0.000
•BARRIER, Z1 0.000
C1 0.000
• 1 X 0.000 Z 0.000 Y1 0.000
2 X 0.000 Z 0.000
3 X 0.000 Z 0.000
4 X 0.000 Z 0.000
5 X 0.000 Z 0.000
6 X 0.000 Z 0.000
• WERKZEUGWECHSELPUNKT•
7 X300.000 Z400.000

•I • JI I I
1RDY2RDY
SPS Ausb ProgPara Achsen Set Up 1 Menue

T •• -. #... x... z••. Input

Tool number of tool Selection of T••• #( ... )Z( ••• )X( ••• )
with which the bar- barrier point
rier point is to be from l - 6
set
III. Po~itioning the tool on the obstacle:
l. Move the slide up to the chuck or
on to the tailstock/the opposed spindle.
2. With the handwheel (pulse gen.), move the
tool carrier to the maximum position in
X and Z directions (see section "Slide
movement").
IV. Setting barrier.points
l. Press the ~.key: the position of ~
the barrier point is calculated and dis-
played.
2. Press thP lto-"'l
key: the calculated
data will be as.signed to the selected
barrier point and entered under X..•
and Z..• in the CRT screen.

02.95 PRAL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
10.29
TX 8F
 Setting up

Barrier (safe zone) around chuck

Note:
- In the case of chuck barriers, it is best to define
the barrier point# 1 with external machining tools and
the barrier points 2 and 3 with internal machining tools.

ASP

#1 X370 2161
#2 X100 2141
#3 xso 2125

protected zone

Determine all points in accordance with the

above procedure.

10.30 02.9!:i PRAL

TX 8F
 Setting up

Barrier (safe zone) around collet

Only point# 1 is determined in accordance
with the above procedure. Points# 2 and# 3
must be overwritten with zero.
The spindle centre (XO), however, remains open
for boring through.

02.95 PRAL
10.31
TX SF ---------------------
 Setting up

V. Checking the barrier function

1. In MDI mode call up the tool used to set

the barriers (safe zone) and program a
traverse block by which it is possible ·to
move up to the first barrier point at some
distance.
G59 XO Z300
TlOl
GO Xl50 Zl00

a
HDNI1DR
2. In automatic mode run the set-up
program in single block mode.

[i]
r m1

3. Switch to manual mode (FO):

·with the pulse generator (handwheel) move
the slide in direction of the barrier
point (on chuck or opposed spindle).
4. When reaching the value set in Set Up 2,
an alarm must be triggered and displayed ALARM
on the CRT.
If this does not happen, the barrier
point must be set again.
5. Repeat the procedure from point l on
for all barrier points.

02.95 PRAL
10.32
TX 8F
 ,_ -· .-

Setting up.II

Contents Chapter. Page

IN-OIJT 11 • 3
Reading in programs and data • 3

Output of programs and data 9

Interfaces • 12
Interface configuration • 14

08.90 11.1
TXSF
tlRAUr.] Setting up II

11.2 08.90
1XSF
 Setting up II
IN-Olff .

.•
IN-Olff

r-~,.
CRT 110de:

Select CRT mode. CRT mode

Reading in programs and data

Move the menu bar to DATA IN.

1. Reading in the program

Press the HO key PROGRAM INPIIT. program input IHo!
~--~-~ .
t·.OATUN.. DATA OUT ASSOCIATION PARAMETER
IN OUT /DATA IN / PROGRAM INPUT
Program 18% 12/ 64
.. Otaracter (Ot)14'll. E00132000
0: 1. Ch: 826 Program Input
0: 2 Ch: 150
0:
0:
s
ss
Ch:
Ch:
136
9
Program Number:
System Number: $
ru INPUT ON CRT
0: 118 Ch: 73 N"" Block:
0: 3:33 Ch: 177
0: SX) Ch: 239
0: ~1 Ch: 191
0: eoo Ch: 179
S)
0: e!l1 Ch:
0:
0:
1000
1001
Ch:
Ch: = ~

ROY

r.rograni,j Progra"'I Data

Innut:m, Mer;;e I nnut
vnput
Stan
f°"'Pare I IP~e
A ive

1.2.1 Reading in a program

Enter the program number of the external
program and, if necessary, refer only to
a specific subsystem $1/2/3 in this program.
reading in It~-
Confinn the input by pressing the
key. The read-in cycle runs:
Ito-I.
The program or a subsystem-specific part of
it is displayed in 'the bottom half of the
window.
The program number from the tape or the ex-
ternal program is entered as program number.

08.90 11.3
TXSF
fiRAUEfl Setting-up II
IN-OUT

1.2.2 Reading in several programs

Prerequisite:
or A block of pr_ograms can only be read in if
its start and end have been marked by a
i character when creating the program.

. -- -,,,:;:.:
·DATA .JR•.a DATA OUT ASSOCIATION PARAMETER
INOUT I DATA IN / PROGRAM INPUT
Program - 18'J, 12/ 64
Characters (Ch~4% 4S:XJ/32Xl0
0: 1 0,: 825
0: 2 Ch: 150 Program Input
0: s Ch: 1::0 Program Number:
0: . 5S 0,: 9 1t
0: 116 0,: 73
System Number $

INPUT ON CRT 0: 333 Ch: 177 N~ Block

0: S00 Ch: 2:39
0: S21 Ch: 191
0: 600 Ch: 179
0: eo1 Ch: eo
0: 1000 Ch: 2:32
0: 1001 Ch: S2

ROY

.Progr~lProgramlData
l.no.ut±-";'.;-~. Herne Innut
lnput
ton I !"Compare I rPage
l"Active

Enter the program number of the first external

program and, if necessary, refer only to a
specific subsystem $1/2/3 in these programs.

Confirm the input by pressing the

key. The read-in cycle runs:
It~-!_
The program block or a subsystem-specific
part of it is displayed in the bottom half
of the window.

read-in 1.3 The read-in cycle can be aborted by pressing

cycle can· be the softkey ii .
aborted by
pressing
this key

11.4 08.90
TXBF
 Setting up II
IN-OUT_
. .
~~~~~~~¥~~7~~41"'~~:··.

2. Adding a program (Program Merge)

"EEi Softkey PROGRAM MERGE"

Prerequisite: program merge IH1j
The program to be read in can only be
added if no program number has been
assigned when creating the program •
.. . ..
'-DATA . rnJ DATA OUT ASSOCIATION PARAMETER
IN OUT/ DATA IN / PROGRAM MERGE
Program 18% 121 64
Character (Ch)°14% 4500/32000
0: 1 Ch: 826 Program Merge
0: 2 Ch: 190
0: 5 Ch: 136 Program Number:
1"'
0: 55 Ch: 9 System Number: $
0: 118 Ch: 73 New Block:
0:
0:
0:
=
600
521
Ch:
Ch:
Ch:
177
Z39
191
INPUT ON CRT
0: 600 Ch: 179
0: 601 Ch: 50
0: 1000 Ch: 232
0: 1001 Ch: 52

ROY
Jrogram f_~rogr~mjData
lncut -Merae. · lnout
~nptit
too I fComi>arel f:~" iVP

2.2 Adding a program (Program-Merge)

Enter the program number of the internal
NC program and. if necessary. refer only
to a specific subsystem $1/2/3 in these
programs to which the external program is
to be added.

Confirm the input by pressing the IF~-1. reading in jf(>-1

key. The read-in cycle runs:
The new, external program sections are
displayed in the bottom half of the read-in cycle
window. ·can be aborted l
by pressing th i:s
IHs!
2.3 The read-in cycle can be aborted by key
pressing the softkey. H3

08.90 11.5
.TXSF
 Setting up II
-IN-OUT

.•
3. Reading in data blocks
reading
in data Softkey READ IN-DATA

-!DAiATr,f".
.::; '.
DATA OUT
~..,, ASSOCIATION PARAMETER
INOUT/ DATA IN / DATA INPUT
Program 1B'l' 12/ 64
Characters (Ch)l4% EIXJ/32000
0: 1 Ch: 826 Data Input
0: 2 Ch: 150
0: 5 Ch: 136 #1: Tools
0: ss 0,: 9 #2: Parameter
0: 118 Ch: 73 #3: Memory Data
INPUT ON CRT 0: 333 Ch: 177 #4: f;xed Cycles
0:
0:
&)CJ
~
Ch:
Ch:
Z39
191
Input Data Type: # ~
0: E00 Ch: 179 New Block:
0: E01 Ch: S)
0: 1000 Ch: 232
0: 1001 Ch: 52

.
ROY
•Progra,-ProgramrDatl!lk,_~ ·1 nput
ln"'ut Merqe 1
----~ Sto"' I ICompare! !Page
Ac+-ive

3.2 Reading in specific data blocks

Select the external data by entering
the digits
1 for #1 tool data
2 for #2 parameters
3 for #3*
4 for #4*

11°0-I reading in Confirm the input by pressing their(>-!_

key. The read-in cycle runs:
The new external data are displayed in
the bottom half of the window.
r.::, read-in cycle 3.3 The read-in cycle can be aborted by
~ can be aborted
by pressing pressing the softkey 113
this key

* Only for lRAUB- after-sales service!

11.6 08.90
TXSF
 Setting up -II
IN~UT

4. Comparing
First level -
Em Softkey COMPARE compare
A new CRT picture is cre~ted with new
assignment of the softkey bar.
4.1 Comparing.programs Second level
t!Q Softkey PROGRAM COMPARE program
compare
•.• ··•·"---1 .....
'
cDATA l_fi,,, DATA OUT ASSOCIATION PARAMETER
INOLJT / DATA IN / COMPARE / PROGRAM COMPARE
'
Program · 18'l(, 12/ 64
Character (Ch) 14% 4S00/32000
0: 1 Ch: 826 Program
0:
0:
0:
2
5
55
0,:
0,:
Ch:
190
136
9
Program Number:
System Number: $
m
.

0:
0:
118
333
Ch:
Ch: 177
73 Input Data Type: INPUT ON CRT
0: 500 Ch: 239
0: 521 0,: 191 .
0: SCIO Qi: 179
0: Ei01 Ch: 50 Comp. Data:
0:
0:
1000
1001
Ch:
0,: = S2
.

ADY
Prog~~
~i?e .
lllata l~are I I I fag':

4.1.2 Comparing programs

Enter the program number of the internal
NC program and, if necessary. refer only
to a specific subsystem $1/2/3 in these
programs with which the active external
program is to be compared.

Confinn the- i~put by pressing the·lr~-,. .

key. The read{in cycle runs: ·
If the control system detects deviations
reading in 1t~1
between the NC program and the external
program blocks. the r.ead-in cycle will be
stopped and the deviating block will be
displayed in the bottom half of the window.
continue
The comparison continues after
key has been pressed again.
thP·ltE>-. reading in
after STOP·

08.90 11.7
TXSF
'. . . '.---·

Setting up II
ITRAUEtl IN-OUT

r.::, read-.i n eye le .•

~ can be aborted
by pressing 4.1.3 Press the softkey H3 to
this key abort the ~ad-in cycle.

4.2 Comparing tool data.and parameter data

!H2! data compare
~ Softkey DATA COMPARE

DJi:J:~_jjj DATA OUT ASSOCIATION PARAMETER

IN our/ DATA IN / COMPARE / DATA COMPARE

Program 18% · 12/ 64

0: , Ch: 825
Character (Ch) 14% 4SXJ/32000
Data Compare:
0: 2 Ch: ,so ..
0: 5 Ch: 1:$ #1: Tool
0: 55 Ch: 9 #2: Parameter
INPUT ON CRT 0: 118 Ch: 73 #3: Memory Data
0:
0:
0:
333
SOC>
Ch:
0,:
177
239
Compare Data Type: # Ii.
521 Ch: 191 Input Data:
0: eoo 0,: 179
0: eo1 Ch: SJ
0: 1000 0,: 232
0: 1001 Ch:· 52 Comp~ Data:

ROY .
rrogram•
Co=arel
f·.r~a
Dat~jf Compare!
~· Stoa I I ~Page
Active

4.2.2 Comparing data

Define the type of ~ata by entering
the digits
1 for #1 tool data
2 for #2 parameters
3 for #3*

It(>-! reading in
Confirm the input by pressing the
key. The read-in cycle runs:
Ir(>- ~
If the control system detects deviations
between the NC data and the external data,
the read-in cycle will be stopped and the
deviating data will be displayed in the
bottom half of the window.
read-in cycle
can be aborted . 4.2.3 The read-in cycle can be aborted by
by pressing
this key pressing the softkey H3.

11.8 -08.90
TXSF
 Setting up II
IN-OUT

Output of programs and data

Move the menu bar to DATA OUT.
1. Program output
1.1 Selecting the program
1.1.1 In the basic picture:
By pressing the arrow keys at the edge
OJ or CT}
select NC program;
of the CRT (screen) set the cursor to
the NC program the output of which is
required and select by pressing ther--.-1
select; [±I
key. l...1f..
o r
1.1.2 After opening the input window:
· -Enter the NC program number of the in- INPUT ON CRT
ternal program and, if necessary, refer
only to a specific subsysten $1/2/3 in
this program. . program output; !Ho!
1.2 .. HO· Softkev PROGRAM OUTPUT open input wjndow;
WATA.
DATA IN .,_,.,... our""'
. , ASSOCIATION
~ ~
PARAMETER
INOUT / DATA OUT/ PROGRAM OUTPUT
.

Program 18% 12/ 64

Character (Ch) 14% 4S00/32000
0: 1 Ch: 826 Program Out
0: 2 Ch: 190
0:
0:
5
55
Ch:
Ch:
136
9
Program Number:
System Number: $
m
·0: 118 Ch: 73 Blocks Civen Out:
0: 333 Ch: 177 '
0: $X) Ch: 239
0: 521 .. Ch: 191
0: eoo Ch: 179
0: 601 01: 50
0: 1000 Ch: 232
0: 1001 Ch: ·52

ROY

~~~:1111 I Data
o,............. 1-· Output
s...._ __ I I j;age
- A-=-••-

1.2.1 Output of a program

Confirm the input by pressing the

key. The output cycle runs:
,r~-1-
The program that is to be sent or a output 1r-0--1
subsystem-specific part of it is dis-
played in the bottom half of the window.

08.90 11.9
1X8F
 Setting up II
IN-OUT

.•
or 1.2.2 Output of several programs

OJ block start,
Select start and end of the program block
.by means of the arrow keys at the ed~f
the CRT and mark it by pressing the .
CI] block end,
key. On output, the start an en ·
of the block which is now highlighted in
[±I mark; - blue, is marked automatically with a%
symbol. ·

··----~
DATA IN __pJ..Jll...Q!l!... ASSOCIATION PARAMETER
IN our/ DATA OUT / PROGRAM OUTPUT
Program 111% 12/ 64
Character (Ch) 14% 4&lO/ 32000
Data Output
marked block appears; Program Number:
System Number: $
Blocks Given Out:

llata Output Page·

Out ut Sto Active

!F(>- output;
Confinn the input by pressing th"
key. The output cycle runs:
lt<>-1.
The NC programs that are being sent (or
a subsystem-specific part of them) are
displayed in the bottom half of the window.
output cycle
can be 1.3 The output cycle can be aborted by pressing
aborted by
pressing the softkey H3
this key

11.10 08.90·
TXSF
 Setting
IN-OUT
up II fi"RAUifl
_ _

.•
2. Output of tool data and parameter data
from the HC memory

~ Softkey DATA OUTPUT data output; !Hol

~ ~.Q
DATA IN. ~~!~. QUT ,f ASSOCIATION_ PARAMETER
IN OUT; DATA OUT / DATA OUTPUT
Program 18% . 12/ 64
I Character (Ch) 14% 4500/3:,000
0: 1 CII: 826 ~ Data Output
0: 2 CII: 1SO ~
#1: Tool
0:
0: $
5 Ch:
Ch:
136
9
! #2'. Parameter
0: 118 Ch: 73 #3: Memory Data
0: 333 Ch: 177 INPUT ON CRT
0:
0:
0:
SX)
521
600
Ch:
Ch:
CII:
=
191
179
Output Data Type:
Memory Data Type: ·
Blocks Given Out:
#
Im
"
.

0: E01 Ch: so
0:
0:
1000
-1001
Ch:
CII: =52

.
ROY
Programl
Outnut 1g~:~:#!l-~~~ut I I I I Page
rActive

2.3 Output of specific data blocks

· Select the external data by entering
"!;he digits
1 for #1 tool data
2 for #2 parameters
3 for #3*

Confinn the input by pressing the

key. The outpu~ cycle runs:
1r~~1. output; !Fo--!
The data being isent are displayed in output cycle can
the bottom halt of the window. be aborted by
2.4
t
'·
The output cycle can be aborted by
pressing thi~ f
key
HS!
pressing the softkey H3

* Only for TRAUB after-sales service!

08.90 11.11
TXSF
 - ......

Setting up II
IN-OUT

Interfaces
Move the menu bar to ASSOCIATION.
1. The basic picture that appears shows the
currently valid interfaces according to their
· (Function}: #Ol'Reading in data/programs
· .,:.••·· · #02 Output of data/programs
#04 Printing macro
#05 Setting PLC read-in/
#06 read-out
2. By means of the arrow keys at the edge of
the CRT (screen) or on the NC control panel,
OJ select
interface
select the interface function to be modified.

OJ function; 3. Open the input window by pressing the!F<>-L

key.
no;::-- open input
~ window

DATA IN
: , ,:- , M---..••
'"'""-'>-"•• -~-·
DATA OUT ~0~!.~!!0NJi PARAMETER
IN OUT/" ASSOCIATION

_(Function) ( Interface) (Parameter Set)

INPUT ON CRT :_cif[µa,;:_~ ~~1g~,..1W,:¾la4,~~~:;¾~

02 Data Out 1 0: V24
:
03
04 MaCIOF'rint
05 SPS In
, -
: V24
06 SPS Out : V24
a, :
08 :
09 :
10 :

i
'
!'!DY
. I I I I I fReturn I

4. Interface
The interfaces are set in our works and
should not be modified!

11.12 08.90
TXBF
 Setting up II
IN-OUT ·

5. Parameter set
0 to 3
Redefine the interface definition as
specified in the parameter function.
Confirm the inp~t by pressing the
kev.
., .,(!
IF<>-L
·----·
ff .liM .., ...·
~

f~
~1
~tore
input JF<>-!
_ __

08.90 11.13
TXSF
 Setting up, II
-IN_-Ollf

.•

Interface configuration
Set the menu bar to PARAMETER.
1. Parameter
The basic picture that appears shows the
parameter set in_terface configured in our works.
selected;·
2. HO softkey parameter set O

3. By pressing the IF<>- -key, open the input

window in which the interface settings
open input documented in the basic picture can be
window; changed.
DATA IN DATA our ASSOCIATION
IN OUT I 'f>ARAMETER SET 0
~P,ARAM~
-~- -.
~~., ~. ., ----
01 Device Name <~> 16 Title Feed Output <Y>
02 Reset Possible < > 17 Feed Chr. < &l>
03 Baudrate < 1200> 18 <0>
no> 19 Parity V <N>
INPUT ON CRT 04
05
Parity Bit
Stop Bit
<
< 1> :20 Time Out < 0>
06 Chr. Length <B> 21 Waiting Time <0>
C17Term. Type <EORIEOB> 22 <0>
08 Ccde1 <00> Z3 EIACode [ <00>
09 Ccde2 <00> ] <00>
10 Rewind code <00> # <00>
11 Handshake Type
12 Parit. DC-Cede
<RTS/CTS>
<N>
-
E

:
<00>
<00>
<00>
13 DC2/DC4 Output <0>
14 CR Output <Y> $ <00>
15 Output Code <ISO> ! "<00>

F<a'i
rt-'ar~-~- Pa ram.
Set ..O ... · Set 1
fSet
Pa ram. IPa ram. I
2 Set 3 I l I
4. Changing settings
By means of the arrow keys CiJ
and-c:I]
Ci] anCIJ at the edge of the CRT, move the
select parameter; light blue cursor to the parameter to be
changed and press the horizontal arrow
· keys : ~ or : ~ ·to change the
~~nd~ characteristics. ··
select charac- After all parameters to be changed have
teristics;
0-I
1!
0
store all
modifica-
been entered, oventrite the old ones by
pressing Ito-I -
tions

11.14 -08.90
1XSF
 Setting up II
IN-OUT

Parameter list TX 8F

Position Parameter Input

#01 Device name V24
#02 Reset possible y
#03 Baud rate 1200 bps
#04 Parity no
#05 Stop bit 1
#06 Character length 8
#07 Termi n. type no
#08 Code 1 00
#09 Code 2 00
#10 Rewind code 00
#11 Handshake type RTS/CTS
#12 Parit. DC code N
#13 DC2/DC4 output 0
#14 . CR output y
#15 Output code ISO
#16 Title feed output N
#17 Feed character 0
#18
#19 Parity V N
#20 Time out 0
#21
#22 OPEN DEVICE 0
#23 EIA code 00

Setting the ASSIGNMENT in the control system

Function Interface Parameter set

Reading_ in 1 0 V24
Output 1 0 V24

08.90
11.15
TX SF
 Setting up II
IN-OUT

08.90
11.16
TX 8F
CRT (screen) displays

Contents

PLC error displays: A... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.02

Display texts: H... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.12

NC error displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . 20.25

Operating errors in EDIT and IN/OUT: E ... . 20.25
General operating errors: M01 .. . . 20.31
General operating errors: M02 .. . . 20.34
Abort criteria: T01 .../T02 ... /T03 ... /T04 ... . 20.35
Servo errors: S... . 20.39
Spindle errors: S .. . . 20.45
Module alarms: Y .. . . 20.49
System alarms: Z .. ./P ... . 20.52
General information in MDI, IN//OUT and simulation . 20.54
Programming errors: P ... . 20.56

up to version No. 42

03.96 20.1
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

PLC error displays A ...

Error display Cause Remedy

A001 Machine Emergency Stop push-button Unlock button;

EMERGENCY pressed, axes traversed to end clear axes;
STOP limit press DRIVES OFF key

A002 Main drive Main drive temperature exceeded, Allow to cool;

temperature protective motor switch (external check for overload;
fan) has tripped press DRIVES OFF key

A003 Auxiliary drive Thermistor or protective motor Allow to cool;

thermistor switch of one of the auxiliary check for overload;
drives has tripped press DRIVES OFF key

A004 Motor overload Protective motor switch or Check appropriate circuit for
tripped automatic fuse has tripped overload or short circuit;
press DRIVES OFF key

AOOS X-axis 1 Overload clutch of X1-axis Select PLC SWITCH 32 "Clear

overload disengaged; from overload";
collision {TOOUPARA-H?-H0-32-INPUT),
press DRIVES ON key; clear axis;
re-engage clutch; DRIVES OFF /
ON

A006 Z-axis 1 Overload clutch of Z1-axis seeA00S

overload disengaged;
collision

AOO? NC Ready Fault in NC or axis amplifier Refer to corresponding NC error;

missing press DRIVES OFF key

AOOB Hydraulic Hydraulic oil low or filter clogged Top up oil or clean/change filter
level / filter

A009 Hydraulic pressure Hydraulic pressure missing for No oil,

missing more than 1 second pump not running,
pressure switch set incorrectly;
press DRIVES OFF key

A010 Main motor rpm Speed deviation on main motor Reduce load,
deviation greater than maximum permissible check system,
tolerance of 20%, e.g. overload press RESET key to clear error
display

20.2 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A011 Opposed spindle Speed deviation on opposed Reduce load,

rpm deviation spindle greater than maximum check system;
permissible tolerance of 20%, e.g. press RESET key
overload, belt breakage

A012 No chuck prox. Limit switch of work-holding Check setting or function

switch active equipment set incorrectly or
defective

A013 Both chuck prox. Limit switch of work-holding Check setting or function
switch act. equipment set incorrectly or
defective

A014 Chuck open with Work-holding equipment not Close work-holding equipment or
rot. spindle closed on speed call-up select M77 and AUTOMATIC
RUN key; press RESET key

A015 Stop feed rate/ Fault in NC or axis amplifier See corresponding NC error
spindle NC display

A016 Main spindle No "Ready" message from main Check fuses, converter,
drive fault drive converter main drive;
press DRIVES OFF key

A017 Opposed spindle No "Ready" message from Check fuse, converter, main drive;
drive fault opposed spindle converter press DRIVES OFF key

A018 Central lubrication Oil level of central lubrication Top up oil for central lubrication
press. system too low system; then ventilate piping

A019 Fault on chuck Lubrication pressure missing Check lubrication unit for chuck
lubrication lubrication (lubricant level);
press NC RESET key

A020 Tur1/Dr1 T call-up while rotation tools are Rectify program;

programming fault activated or simultaneous press RESET key;
programming of turret indexing restart program
and driven tools

A021 Turret 1 error Limit switch "locked/unlocked" set Check setting or function;
limit switch incorrectly or defective press RESET key

A022 Turret 1 indexing Tool indexing time of turret 1 Check speed, limit switch, angle
time over exceeded encoder;
press RESET key

03.96 20.3
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A023 Turret 1 not Turret 1 not in locked position Lock turret

locked home (set-up mode);
check limit switch

A024 Turret 1 Turret 1 locked in wrong Move turret to position (set-up

No reference position mode);
position check angle encoder

A025 Turret 1 parity Parity error of angle Check angle encoder

is missing encoder

A026 Turret 1 wrong An inadmissible tool number has Rectify program,

T-number been programmed press RESET key

A027 Quill pressure/ Quill not in operating position, Move quill to working position,
work pas. quill pressure drop =; no move quill forward or in basic
clamping pressure position

A028 Steady not Pressure drop on steady Check pressure switch or

clamped hydraulic system

A029 Steady end pos./ Steady neither closed or Close or open steady
collision open

A030 B17XXXX
wrong B-value

A031 !HS start error Gripper head of !HS in Swivel gripper head in set-
undefined position when starting a up mode to a defined
program position

A032 Fault on workpiece Time for traverse movement Move sorter in set-up mode
sorter elapsed, · to basic position
fault limit switch of sorter

A033 Tailstock/ Tailstock has reached collision Move tailstock to working position
steady collision barrier X/Z

A034 Amp!. driven No "Ready" message of Check power supply to

tools not ready converter for tool drive or converter or BUC basic unit
message of BUC basic unit

A035 Speed deviation Speed deviation greater than Reduce load;

driven tool permissible tolerance, e.g. check system;
overload, belt breakage press RESET key

A037 BUC operation Error during switching-on CheckBUC;

ready missing procedure or when operating press DRIVES OFF key
BUC incoming/feedback unit

20.4 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A038 Bar feed not Switching-on conditions for bar Establish switching-on conditions
ready feed not met as per description for bar
feed

A039 Tailstock Tailstock in left end position. Move tailstock to the right
end position Cannot be coupled because until alarm goes out.
tailstock and slide are not in Move slide $1 in coupling position
coupling position towards tailstock

A040 Quill is M26 / M27 has been programmed, Select quill on control panel
not selected but quill was deactivated

A041 FHS slide control No signal or continuous signal Check or replace switch on FHS
from one switch slide

A042 FHS not ready An M-function has been used for Select FHS
FHS although the FHS was not
selected

A043 FHS no pneumatic

pressure

A046 Interlock, hand-held Can transmission to hand-held Check hand-held control panel
control panel control panel interrupted while and connecting lead, press Reset
panel active

A047 Error main Main spindle brake not Check brake and limit
spindle brake completely open with rotating main switch;
spindle press NC RESET key

A048 Error opposed Opposed spindle brake not Check brake and limit
spindle brake completely open with rotating switch;
opposed spindle press NC RESET key

A049 Fault with Power-operated guard does not Check actuation speed;
safety guard open or close in preset time or prevent actuation of switch strip
switch strip on door edge is while opening or closing
actuated while opening or
closing

A050 X-axis 2 see A005

overload

A051 Z-axis 2 see A005

overload

A052 V-axis Overload clutch of V-axis see A00S

overload disengaged;
collision

03.96 20.5
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A053 Y-axis Overload clutch of Y-axis see A005

overload disengaged;
collision

A055 PX-axis Overload clutch of PX-axis (X-axis see A00S

overload IHS) disengaged;
collision

A056 PZ-axis Overload clutch of PZ-axis (Z-axis seeA00S

overload IHS) disengaged;
collision

A057 23-axis Overload clutch of 23-axis seeA00S

overload disengaged;
collision

A070 Turret 1: T actual Turret has indexed to wrong Check correct functioning of turret
not equal to T station or shaft-angle encoder and/or shaft-angle encoder, press
required defective Reset

A0B0 No pneumatic
pressure

A081 Op. spindle Pressure drop on opposed spindle Check pressure switch or
pressure missing hydraulic system

A083 Tool wear Tool worn Change worn tool;

$1 reset tool life;
confirm with NC RESET.
Restart machine

A084 Tool breakage $1 Tool broken Change tool;

confirm breakage display
with NC RESET key.
Restart machine

A086 Cross-boring
mechanism overload

A087 Coolant level Maximum coolant level reached Check correct functioning of
submergible pump or probe, press
Reset

A088 Interlocking safety Guard is not locked during Check switch on locking
guard automatic start magnet

A090 Probe signal No gauging probe signal during 1) Check gauging probe transfer
missing $1 GB traverse block interval • X178
2) Check programming of
positioning or nominal
position

20.6 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A091 Parameter error $1 Incorrect address programming for Rectify programming

G 201, G 204, G 205 in $1 • see "Internal measurement
TX8F"

A092 Probe signal No gauging probe signal during 1) Check gauging probe transfer
missing $2 GS traverse block interval MT • X179
2) • A090

A093 Parameter error $2 Incorrect address programming for Rectify programming

G 201, G 205 in $2 • see "Internal measurement
TX8F"

A094 Error with probe Before the second probing, the Programming of G302 A...
signal $1 gauging probe has "1" signal at Check probe or probe transfer
G302 (probe not cleared) interval.
Monitoring from (#27 BIT 5=1)

A095 Error with probe see A094 see A094

signal $2

A 102 Air conditioning Air conditioning unit not operating Check air conditioning unit or
unit fault properly; activate circuit breaker;
automatic circuit breaker tripped or press RESET key
switched off

A103 Error thermo Temperature sensors defective Check sensors;

compensation or not connected. check parameters
Correction value too great
(possibly wrong parameters)

A110 Main spindle Speed deviation on main spindle Check belt tension,
rpm deviation greater than tolerance set with reduce load
parameter, e.g. belt tension, belt
breakage ...

A 111 Opposed spindle see A110 seeA110

nact <> ntarg

A112 Pinion gear Coupling positioned tooth to Press RESET key;

not coupled tooth restart machine

A113 Error ejector Error display issued if part cannot Remove part;
end position be ejected from opposed spindle press RESET key;
• stop spindle feed restart machine

A 114 No end position After switching on, remnant Move to end position (set-up
remnant removal removing device not in end position mode) or check limit switch

03.96 20.7
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A117 Driven tools Rotating drive disengages from Press RESET key;
1 not locked lock during operation restart machine
(overload)

A 118 Driven tool $1 fault Fault on converter or motor of tool See error list RA ... {Drive for
drive rotating tools)

A 119 Driven tool $1 rpm see A035

deviat.

A 120 Turret 2/Drive 2 T call-up while rotation tools are Rectify program;
programming activated or press RESET key;
fault simultaneous programming of restart program
turret indexing and driven tools

A121 Turret 2 Limit switch "locked/unlocked" set Check setting or function;

Limit switch error .incorrectly or defective press RESET key

A122 Turret 2 Tool indexing time of turret 2 Check speed, limit switch, angle
Indexing time over exceeded encoder;
press RESET key

A123 Turret 2 Turret 2 not in locked position Lock turret (set-up mode);
Not locked home check limit switch

A124 Turret 2 Turret 2 locked in wrong Move turret to position (set-up

Not in basic position mode);
position check angle encoder

A125 Turret 2 Parity error of angle encoder Check angle encoder

Parity is missing

A126 Turret 2 An inadmissible tool number has Rectify program;

Wrong T-number been programmed press RESET key

A127 Turret 1 not indexed Turret not engaged in indexing Check turret head or switch
mechanism or pre-indexing switch position;
defective press RESET key

A128 Turret 1 not indexed Turret not engaged in indexing Check turret head or switch
mechanism or pre-indexing switch position;
defective press RESET key

A129 Quill is not Quill key on control panel not Actuate QUILL key;
selected actuated press RESET key

20.8 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A 130 Tailstock not in Tailstock is not swung in or out; Check limit switch
end position limit switch is not actuated

A 131 Drilling attachment Tool changing time of drilling Check station and stop
changing time attachment exceeded switch;
press RESET key

A 132 Error drilling More than one station switch Check station switch;
attachment station emits signal press RESET key
switch

A 133 B-axis not Unlocking limit switch not Check limit switch
unlocked actuated

A 134 B-axis not Locking limit switch not Check limit switch
locked actuated·

A 135 B-axis end switch Limit switch "locked/unlocked" Check setting or function
defective incorrectly or defective

A 136 C-axis 1 error mode M127 programmed after Rectify program

of op. M17

A137 Check B-axis B-axis no longer in position Rectify program

position window

A 150 Sensor piece No signal or continuous signal Check sensor, check sensor
checking from ejector control sensor actuation (functional check)

A170 Turret 2: Tactual not see A070 seeA070

equal to T required

A183 Tool wear $2 Tool worn Change worn tool;

reset tool life.
Confirm with NC RESET key.
Restart machine

A184 Tool breakage $2 Tool broken Change tool;

confirm breakage message
with NC RESET key.
Restart machine

A 186 Cross-boring
mechanism2
overload

A201 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 01 Kumo customer

A202 F-Kumo alarm ·Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 02 Kumo customer

03.96 20.9
TX8F
ITRAUtJ CRT {screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A203 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 03 Kumo customer

A204 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 04 Kumo customer

A205 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 05 Kumo customer

A206 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 06 Kumo customer

A207 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 07 Kumo customer

A208 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 08 Kumo customer

A209 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 09 Kumo customer

A210 F-Kumo alarm Error display programmed via F- See error description of individual
message 10 Kumo customer

A212 No chuck prox. Limit switch of work-holding Check setting or function

switch active equipment (opposed spindle) set
incorrectly of defective

A213 Both chuck Limit switch of work-holding Check setting or function

proximity switches equipment (opposed spindle) set
active incorrectly or defective

A214 Chuck open with Work-holding equipment of Close work-holding equipment or

rotating opposed opposed spindle not closed on select M77 and AUTOMATIC
spindle speed call-up RUN key;
press RESET key

A216 $2 wrong tool Inadmissible T-number Rectify program

number programmed for lateral slides '

A217 Driven tool 2 Rotating drive disengages from Press RESET key;
not locked lock during operation restart machine
(overload)

A218 Alarm driven see A118

tool 2

A219 Driven tools 2 see A035

rpm deviation

A220

20.10 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

A221

A222

·A223

A224

A225

A226

A227

A228 Steady 2
not clamped

A229 Steady 2 limit

position/collision

A230 Fault, air-conditioner

A231

A232

A233 .
A234

A235

A236 C-axis 2 M227 programmed after Rectify program

error mode M117

A237

A238

A239

A253 Axis fault,

remaining travel

A254 Chip conveyor Chip conveyor blocked Clear chip conveyor in set-up
faulty mode;
switch drives off;
press RESET key

03.96 20.11
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Display texts H ...

Display text Cause Remedy

H001 Move to reference see H002

point X-axis 1

H002 Move to reference Reference point not approached Approach reference point
point Z-axis 1

H003 Main spindle max. a.) Programmed speed too high/ If necessary, modify NC
rpm low program;
b.) Speed limit reached, e.g. ONLY MESSAGE, no program
with G96 V-constant interruption

HOO4 Opposed spindle See HOOS, but for opposed spindle See HOOS, but for opposed
max. rpm reached spindle

HOOS Move to reference see H002

point V-axis

HOO6 Move to reference see H002

point Y-axis

H007 Move to reference see H002

point X-axis 2

HOOS Move to reference see H002

point Z-axis 2

H009 Move to reference see H002

point Z-axis S

HO1O JOG mode locked Mode selector switch set to SET Set key switch to
UP, PULSE GEN. (handwheel), SETUP
REFERENCE POINT or FEED
RATE (JOG), but key switch not
set to SET UP

HO11 Reserved,
NC signal

HO12 2 subsystems Two subsystems have been Deactivate one subsystem

selected selected in setup mode

20.12 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H013 System selection a.) No additional subsystems can Switch to set-up mode
locked be activated in automatic
mode
b.) In set-up mode, subsystems Set key switch to
can only be activated or SETUP
deactivated if key switch is
set to SET UP

H014 Quill stroke too Quill has moved beyond Move tailstock closer to
large machining area workpiece

H015 M29 Quill did not Quill has been positioned in set-up Retract quill in set-up mode
return mode and must not be moved to
basic position by M29

H016 M/C requires Execute service as per Activate maintenance in display

serviceing maintenance manual /SUPPLY/ WORKPIECE
COUNTER by pressing
<Maintenance> softkey and
confirm with <Input>

H017 Central lub./hydr. Oil level of central lubrication Top up oil

level system too low

H018 Safety cover is Protective cover not closed Close protective cover
open completely

H019 Switch drives on Drives are switched off Switch on drives

H020 Switch NC After remedy and confirmation of Switch the NC off and then on
OFF/ON an axis overload error {A005, again
A006,A050,A051,A052,A053,
A055 or A056}

H021 Drives off a.) In case of machine Rectify malfunction as per error
automatically malfunction list or set workpiece counter to
b.) or if set workpiece quantity non
is reached
Switch drives OFF and then ON
again

H022 M-Confirmation The auxiliary function programmed When using additional

missing $1 in subsystem 1 is not executed or attachments check PLC options;
confirmed check functions in MDI or SET-
UP; press RESET key

H023 M-Confirmation same as H022, but in subsystem 2

missing $2

03.96 20.13
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H024 M-Confirmation same as H022, but in subsystem 3

missing $3

H025 M-Confirmation same as H022, but in subsystem 4

missing $4

H026 M-Confirmation same as H022, but in subsystem 5

missing $5

H027 S-Confirmation The nominal speed programmed Check nominal and actual values;
missing $1 in subsystem 1 is not reached press RESET key
.
H028 S-Confirmation same as H027, but in subsystem 2
missing $2

H029 S-Confirmation same as H027, but in subsystem 3

missing $3

H030 S-Confirmation same as H027, but in subsystem 4

missing$4

H031 S-Confirmation same as H027, but in subsystem 5

missing $5

H032 T-Confirmation Tool turret of subsystem 1 has not Move tool turret in set-up mode to
missing $1 reached nominal position or is not indexed position;
locked press RESET key

H033 T-Confirmation same as H032, but in subsystem 2

missing $2

H034 T-Confirmation same as H032, but in subsystem 3

missing $3

H035 T-Confirmation same as H032, but in subsystem 4

missing$4

H036 T-Confirmation same as H032, but in subsystem 5

.
missing $5

H037 B-Confirmation The auxiliary function programmed Check PLC options;

missing $1 in subsystem 1 is not executed or check functions in MDI or SET-UP
confirmed mode;
press RESET key

H038 B-Confirmation same as H037, but in subsystem 2

missing $2

H039 B-Confirmation same as H037, but in subsystem 3

missing $3

20.14 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H040 B-Confinnation same as H037, but in subsystem 4

missing $4

H041 B-Confirmation same as H037, but in subsystem 5

missing $5

H042 Invalid M-value An M-instruction without function Rectify program,

$1 has been programmed in press RESET key
subsystem 1

H043 Invalid M-value same as H042, but in subsystem 2

$2

H044 Invalid M-value same as H042, but in subsystem 3

$3

H045 Invalid M-value same as H042, but in subsystem 4

$4

H046 Invalid M-value same as H042, but in subsystem 5

$5

H047 Invalid B-value A B-instruction without !unction Rectify program,

$1 has been programmed in press RESET key
subsystem 1

H048 Invalid B-value same as H047, but in subsystem 2

$2 .

H049 Invalid B-value same as H047, but in subsystem 3

$3

H050 Invalid B-value same as H047, but in subsystem 4

$4

HOS1 Invalid B-value same as H047, but in subsystem 5

$5

HOS2 Opposed spindle The trailed opposed spindle is not Check function
not on end position locked

HOS3 Main drive Main drive temperature <! 120 °C Check utilisation and ventilation
temperature early of main drive.
warning Press DRIVES OFF key

HOS4 Main drive torque Main drive is operated at torque Check cutting data
limit limit (90% of normal maximum)

HOSS Move to reference see H002

point PX-axis

03.96 20.15
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

-
Display text

H056 Move to reference

Cause .

see H002
Remedy

point PZ-axis

H057 Wrong reference Approaching of reference points Re-approach reference points

points interrupted by RESET or change
of mode of operation

H058 Error with One of the systems did not Switch the NC off and then on
automatic start execute automatic start again

H059 Drilling attachment Drilling attachment is not in one of Check position or switch
not in basic position the 3 stations or corresponding
switch is defective

H060 Sort. device no Workpiece sorter is not in starting Move workpiece sorter in set-up
basic pas position. mode to starting position

H061 Cross sl. not in Cross slides are not in starting Move cross slides in set-up mode
rearpos position to starting position

H062 MAG push. not Pusher of magazine is not in rear Move pusher in set-up mode to
in rear pos end position starting position

H063 MAG clamping Clamping device not open for Insert M11 in program or open
chuck closed programmed bar change clamping device

H064 Magazine see magazine description

programming error

H065 Magazine see magazine description

input error

H066 Magazine mode see magazine description

incorrect

H067 Magazine see magazine description

parameter error

H068 Magazine safety see magazine description

cover

H069 Magazine spindle see magazine description

is rotating

H070 Magazine no see magazine description

reference point

H071 MAG changing see magazine description

time over

20.16 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H072 Magazine no see magazine description

movement

H073 Magazine defect see magazine description

encoder/hardware

H074 Magazine alarm see magazine description

on PC display

H075 MAG no see magazine description

material

H076 MAG no bar/bar see magazine description

too short

H077 Magazine see magazine description

component length

H078 Magazine position see magazine description

component

H079 Magazine O-ride Change magazine at 100% see magazine description

100%forbarchange override

HOBO IHS has no No further pallet with blanks on Insert pallet,

follow-up pallet pallet conveyor move in new pallet

H081 Pallet is not in First pallet with blanks not moved Abort program,
start position incorrectiy at start of machining move in a pallet,
press RESET key

H082 Pallet is in end A pallet has reached the end of Remove pallet.
posttion the cycling table If machine stopped, cycle can be
restarted by pressing
"AUTOMATIC START"

H083 Pallet can't be When moving in, no pallet was Check pallet location and
identified identified within maximum limit switch;
approach press NC RESET key

H084 Pallet has wrong It has been tried to move pallet in Correct contents of R2003 and
distance though "0" increment distance is 8182 ... , resp. and restart moving
·indicated for first blank row in;
press RESET key

HOSS Controlling not Tool monitoring device is in pause Activate monitoring device or
active mode or switched off press NC RESET key

HOBS Cross-boring
mechanism interlock

H087 Coolant level

03.96 20.17
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

HOBB Bar feed is not Bar feed is not selected in Press RESET key or select bar
selected automatic run feed

HOB9 V/Z3 rapid-

traverse reduction

H090 Gauge $1 within Measured value within Is reset on G201 call-up, T call-up
GO range programmed "GO" range ($1) or by pressing RESET

H091 Gauge $1 Programmed tool is being Is reset on G201 call-up, T call-up

correction corrected ($1) or by pressing RESET

H092 Gauge $1 tolerance Measured value outside Change tool,

reachd programmed tolerance limit; no confinn by pressing RESET
tool correction ($1)

H093 Gauge $1 total lnfeed total of programmed tool Change tool,

sum reachd exceeded ($1) confinn by pressing RESET;
reset infeed total

H094 Gauge $2 within • H090 ($2)

GO range

H095 Gauge $2 • H091 ($2)

correction

H096 Gauge $2 • H092 ($2)

tolerance reachd

H097 Gauge $2 • H093 ($2)

tolerance reachd

H09B Gauge open Plus/minus tolerance limit set to Activated/deactivated by softkey in

tolerances maximum (independent of picture:
programming) - Monitor/Auxiliary function/
(P=M=30000 .µm) Gauging

H099 2nd release sw. Timeout control button expired Release control button
Interlock (2 min.)

H100 G87 G87 jointly programmed for $1 (or Chan·ge program, press Reset
programming error $2) in both subsystems

H101 End of tool life $1 Tool or replacement tool group is Change tool(s);
worn ($1); reset tool life ($1);
• last part • stop after M30 restart

H102 End of tool life $2 Tool or replacement tool group is Change tool(s);
worn ($1); reset tool life ($2);
• last part • stop after M30 restart

20.18 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H103 End of tool life $3 Tool or replacement tool group is Change tool(s);
worn ($1); reset tool life ($3);
• last parf• stop after M30 restart

H104 End of tool life $4 Tool or replacement tool group is Change tool(s);
worn ($1); reset tool life ($4);
• last part • stop after M30 restart

H105 End of tool life $5 Tool or replacement tool group is Change tool(s);
worn ($1); reset tool life ($5);
• last part • stop after M30 restart

H106 Amount Required and preset number of Set actual value < required value
components pieces is reached or
reached required value = 0 and RESET

H107 Teach In selected Teach-in (playback) selected by Deactivate teach-in mode

means of key

H108 Driven tool $1 max. Programmed speed too high

rpm

H109 Bar feed fault Bar feed has stopped because of Eliminate fault;
trouble press RESET

H110 Close clamping Clamping device of main spindle Close clamping device
main spdle open too long

H111 Close clamping Clamping device of opposed Close clamping device

opposed spindle spindle open too long

H112 2nd operator field Second operator field is

active activated

H113 Opposed spindle S- or M-instructions have been Rectify program,

wrong programming programmed for opposed spindle press RESET key
while synchr. running was
selected.

H114 Opposed Key switch for selecting second Only message; will be cancelled
clamping 2nd operator field is switched on when deactivating second
panel active operator field

H115 Tailstock in Tailstock and $1 are in a

pick-up positio position where tailstock can be
coupled

H116 Program M34 after Wrong order during programming Pay attention to programming
M37/M38 instructions

03.96 20.19
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H117 No gear ratio No end position reached when Check gearbox

changing gearbox speed

H118 End position Signalling of both end positions Check limit switches
gearbox

H119 RA2 speed limit Programmed speed too high

reached

H120 LSV2: Transmit More than 250 characters are in Check telegram format
buffer full transmitting buffer

H121 LSV2: Receive More than 250 characters are in Check telegram format
buffer full receiving buffer

H122 LSV2: TO Time is Error in telegram execution Check telegram execution and all
expired LSV2 parameters

H123 LSV2: T1 Time is Error in telegram execution Check telegram execution and all
expired LSV2 parameters

H124 LSV2: T2 Time is Error in telegram execution Check telegram execution and all
expired LSV2 parameters

H126 LSV2: 1/0 error The LSV2 interface cannot Check interfaces and their
establish a communication parameters

H127 LSV2:ST,ZS,AL Automatic telegram output not LSV2 RESET;

stored possible; last telegram was not check telegram execution and
terminated status mask

H128 $2X2Z1

H129$1X221 Turret crossing is selected

S2 X1 Z2

H130 Cross-function Option for second subsystem is Set option for second subsystem
not allowed not set

H131 Parameter error #28 Tcross in TOOUPARNAXIS Set #28 Tcross = 1 for X, Z, $1,
tcross is not <1> for X and Z $2
(only with TNL)

H132 Check tool data Not all tool data have been Check all tool data of X, Z in
11 11
crossed SETUP/ OFFSET/ BARRIERS/
LIFE DATA of $1 and $2

H133 Safetyzone Tailstock is at extreme right in

tailstock act. home position

20.20 03.96
TXBF
CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H134 Memory overflow Number of maximum possible cuts Monitor less cuts
all tools to be monitored exceeded with
AWUE (automatic tool
monitoring)

H135 Memory overflow

(one tool)

H136 Monitor tools AWUE (automatic tool monitoring)

monitors all tools selected with
G308

H137 Teach-in for AWUE (automatic tool monitoring):

all tools Teach-in for all tools

H138 Teach-in for AWUE (automatic tool monitoring):

one tool Teach-in for one tool

H139 Teach-in for AWUE (automatic tool monitoring):

sister tool Teach-in for one replacement tool

H140 Calculate limit AWUE (automatic tool monitoring):

graph After "teacti-in" the limit curves are
recalculated after M30 / M730

H141 Program is AWUE (automatic tool monitoring): Stop the program

running While a program is running,
"Monitoring" for example cannot
be selected

H142 Memory is AWUE (automatic tool monitoring): With the F6 control, limit the NC
occupied Memory for AWUE is not free program memory to 160 m

H143 Teach-in cut AWUE (automatic tool monitoring): Teach-in tools

is missing Program cannot be monitored
because limit curves are missing

H144 Cut deviation AWUE (automatic tool monitoring): New "teach-in" or check G308-
Number of "monitoring" cuts instructions
differs from "teach-in" cuts

H145 Error macro AWUE (automatic tool monitoring): Check G308 - macro - parameter
parameter Wrong parameter in G308 macro

H146 Monitoring on AWUE (automatic tool monitoring): At the same time program only
$1 and $2 Monitoring activated in $1 and $2 one G308 in $1 or $2

H147 AWUE

H148AWUE

H149AWUE

03.96 20.21
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause . Remedy

H150 No piece available Workpiece control has responded Component available?

Or check limit switch

H151 B-axis unlocked B-axis is unlocked at automatic Display text goes out the moment
start the B-axis is locked

H152 Servo C-axis Servo C-axis is coupled

is engaged

H153 Servo C-axis Servo C-axis lubricating pressure Clean filter

lubricating pressure too high

H154 Machining unit on

part-off side (BAST)

H155 Working attach- Machining unit on part-off side Move machining unit in set-up
ment not in basic (BAST) not in initial position mode to initial position
position

H156 Machining unit on

part-off side (BAST)

H157 Fault, hand-held Can transmission to hand-held Check hand-held control panel
control panel control panel interrupted

H158 Hand-held control The hand-held control panel has

panel selected been selected, certain cockpit
functions are disabled

H159 Side slides 1-3

disabled

H160 Cityruf modem No "OK" feedback from modem Check interface line or modem
error

H161 Cityruf connection No connection to Telekom Cityruf Check line, modem or telephone
error 01691 connection

H162 Cityruf number Wrong Cityruf number dialled

error

H163 Cityruf error Error during Cityruf dialogue

H164 Cityruf 1/0 error Error in Cityruf interface MC716 Check interface, line or modem
port 4

H165 Repeat Cityruf H165 is displayed while waiting

until transmission is repeated
following a Cityruf dialogue error

H166 Send Cityruf Cityruf error text is being

transmitted

20.22 03.96
TXBF
CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H167 Cityruf on The Cityruf function is active

H168 Cityruf

H169 Cityruf

H170 Cityruf

H171 Save diagnosis,

power

H172 Save diagnosis,

speed

H173 Diagnosis

H174 Diagnosis

H175 Diagnosis

H176 Pallet door open

H178 Inspection cycle

activated

H179 Wrong tool selected

H180 Rinsing opposed Rinsing of the opposed spindle

spindle when work has been selected although the
fixture 2 closed chuck is closed

H181 Hood closed,

synchronisation

H182 Collision, auto-hood

sorter

H186 Cross-boring
mechanism2
interlock .
H190 Important:
Axes coupled

H191 Axes coupled RESEl

H197 F-Kumo Customer-specific F-Kumo See F-Kumo description

Compiler run program is being compiled

H198 F-Kumo Customer-specific F-Kumo Activate F-Kumo section

activated program is correctly compiled (see F-Kumo description)

03.96 20.23
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Display text Cause Remedy

H199 F-Kumo Customer-specific F-Kumo Correct programming errors

Compiling error program contains programming (see F-Kumo description)
errors

H200 Prg. 99999 not Customer-specific F-Kumo See F-Kumo description

available program does not exist

H201 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 01 F-Kumo customer

H202 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 02 F-Kumo customer

H203 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 03 F-Kumo customer

H204 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 04 F-Kumo customer

H205 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 05 F-Kumo customer

H206 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 06 F-Kumo customer

H207 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 07 F-Kumo customer

H208 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 08 F-Kumo customer

H209 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 09 F-Kumo customer

H21 0 F-Kumo reference Display message programmed via See error description of individual
message 10 F-Kumo customer

H220 Interlock all axes

H221

H222

H223

H224

H225

20.24 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

NC error displays

Operating errors in EDIT and IN/OUT : E••.

Error display Cause Remedy

E001 KEY IN ERROR Input of a value without

# number

E002 MAX/MIN Input value has too many Enter correct value
DATA ERROR places

E003 NUMBER NOT Wrong address for parameter

FOUND value;
address does not exist

E004 DEVICE NOT Interface power supply absent;

READY cable not connected

EOOS NOT ACCEPTABLE Data input of APLC counters Set corresponding bit under
and times locked; tool input PLC #49
locked; O = 1 times
1 = 1 counter
Key word E71 locked

E006 OPTION An unspecified menu key has

NOTHING been pressed; an attempt has
been made to enter a non-
existent parameter

EOO? RESET Input/output operation has been

INPUT/OUTPUT aborted by NC RESET or an
error display

E008 PHYSICAL ERROR Wrong parameter value for

interface in NC or on external
unit

E009 TIMEOUT Monitoring time for input/

output function set too short

E010 OVER PROGRAM Existing memory capacity is Delete programs

AREA used up; maximal possible input
range in MDI exceeded

03.96 20.25
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

E011 PROGRAM Program number already exists
NUMBER in NC memory
DUPLICATE

E012 OVER NUMBER Maximum number of program Delete programs

OF PROGRAMS numbers reached

E013 BLOCK NUMBER Block with specified BLOCK

MISSING number is missing

E014 PROGRAM NOT Program number used does not

FOUND exist in memory

E015 EDIT LOCK B Input locked for program B and

C for editing

E016 EDITLOCKC Input locked for program C

E017 PARITY H ERROR Parity error in input format;

horizontal number of positions
faulty

E018 PARITY V ERROR Parity error in input format;

vertical number of positions
faulty

E020 OVER RUN ERROR Data overflow during data Check control characters and
input/output parameters

E021 PROGRAM IS Attempt was made to edit in an

RUNNING elapsed program;
attempt was made to edit
parameters in a running
program;
attempt was made for SET UP
in a running program

E022 CODE CHANGE Wrong code on punched tape,

ERROR etc.

E023 NOT ADD 1/0 No interface print installed

E024 PLC RUNNING Attempt was made to read in,

read out or compare machine
parameters while the PLC is not
in stop mode

20.26 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

E025 DATA MEMORY Data error on punched tape,
ERROR etc., for ex. correction or tool
data have too many positions

E02G SEARCH NOT Nothing found in a search for a

FOUND (EDIT) specific character or character
sequence (string)

E030 INTERFACE Interlace cannot establish Check interlace and its

E040 ERROR communication parameters

E035 COMPARE Wrong or different data when

ERROR compering programs

E050 FILE SYSTEM Should one of these errors occur

ERROR when editing or reading data
E51 File open error in/out, the memory must be
E52 File close error checked
E53 File selection Additional error numbers for
error error displays
E54 File read error ESO .. and EGO ..
E55 File delete Errors
error E.. 04 Time out
ESG File insert 05 Hardware fault
error 07 Control alarm
EGO 1/0 channel error 10 Power supply absent
15 Parity, horizontal
16 Parity, vertical
17 Datq overflow
18 Data conversion error

EOG1 MODE SELECT

EOG2 1/0 PARAMETER Check parameters

ERROR

EOG3 MODE/PARAMETER Check parameters for mode

used
ERROR

EOG4 PROGRAM Program number already exists

NUMBER ERROR in memory

EOG5 PROGRAM When reading in, access to a

NUMBER program numbar already in use
DUPLICATE

EOGG NO PROGRAM There is no program number on Set program number and repeat
NUMBER punched tape, etc. input

03.96 20.27
TXSF
 CRT {screen) displays
ITRAUifl

Error display Cause Remedy

E070 TOOL NUMBER Data already assigned to

DUPLI. entered tool number

E071 TOOL ENTRY A tool number has been entered

OVER that no longer exists in tool
file

E076 TOOL NUMBER Illegal offset number when Select correct tool
ERROR gauging

E077 AXIS NO No reference point of axis to be Approach reference point

REFERENCE gauged
POINT

E078 AXIS MOVEMENT Two or more axes traverse

*(AX UNMATCH) while measuring probe for
TLM automatic tool length
determination is operative

E079 NO REFERENCE Axis has no reference point

POINT (ATC) when approaching with
measuring probe

EOSO TOP SEARCH Start address not found in a

ERROR search

E081 PROGRAM ERROR

E082 ALREADY
RESEARCH

E083 COUNT
OVERFLOW

E084 CANNOT IN/OUT During a running input/output

operation, an attempt has been
made to start a different
input/output routine

E085 LINE BUSY Communication between DNC Interface activated; waiting for
and host computer is active data transfer

E086 INPUT DATA Tool correction data wrong

ERROR or faulty; wrong program values
or parameter tapes

E087 NOT EDIT Playback not allowed in a fixed

PROGRAM cycle;
no subroutine has access to
playback

20.28 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

E088 CAN'T ADD BLOCK Wrong ope_rating mode for Search for end of playback block
playback and then enter data

E091 $ NUMBER ERROR Wrong subsystem

E092 SET POINT OVER

E100 ILLEGAL#- An attempt was made to enter a Select another line number
NUMBER program block with an invalid
line number

E101 ILLEGAL G-CODE In "TRAUB format" an attempt Edit in free format

was made to enter a G-code not
specific to it

E102 ADDRESS Incorrect address data in an NC

PATTERN ERROR block (when editing)

E103 SIZE OVER IN Incorrect format data

BLOCK

E104 COPY AREA

OVER

E105 DATA Set key switch to data

PROTECTION release

E106 O97XX EDIT LOCK

ILLEGAL 2nd G-
CODE

E110 ONLY $1 SYSTEM

E111 $-NUMBER
SELECT ERROR

E112 TOO MANY FILES The number of files in the Make subdirectories
master directory is limited

E113 DISK FULL The disk storage capacity has Use an empty, formatted disk
been exhaused

E114 WRITE PROTECT Data cannot be written to Close write protect slide on
ERROR disk disk

E115 FILE NOT FOUND The specified file does not exist Key in correct file name
on the disk

E116 DISK ERROR General read error

E117 DIRECTORY NOT The specified directory does not Key in correct directory name
FOUND exist

E120 SETTING ERROR

03.96 20.29
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

Error display Cause Remedy

E130 ILLEGAL TAPE
ERROR

E131 ASSOCIATION
ERROR

E132 BAUDRATE OVER

E140 END OF FILE

E141 WRONG DRIVE The drive selected does not

exist in the system

E142 WRONG FILE The file name is incorrect or

NAME contains invalid characters

E143 WRONG
PARAMETER

E144 TOO MANY FILES The user has attempted to open

OPEN several files at once

E145 DRIVE ACTIVE Commands, such as FORMAT, Close files

cannot be executed when a file
is open

E146 FILE WRITE-

PROTECTED

E147 FILE OPENED IN

READ MODE

E148 FILE OPENED IN

WRITE MODE

E149 DIRECTORY NOT Directory cannot be deleted Delete all files in directory
EMPTY

E150 DISK CHANGED The disk has been removed

while accessing a file

E151 UNKNOWN The disk format is unknown Format the disk

FORMAT

E152 FORMAT ERROR The disk has not been formatted Format the disk

20.30 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

General operating errors: M01 ....

M01 OPERATING ERROR The error display "M01 Operating

I I I I I error" is always output in
Error number conjunction wtth an error number
(of an axis name, if necessary),
e.g.:
M01 operating error 0007 X

Error display Cause Remedy

0001 Trip dog overrun Reduce approach speed

Trip dog overrun (axis zero
mark) when approaching
spindle reference point

0002 No reference point Move in front of trip dog and

One pf the machine axes has approach again reference point in
not found the reference point "reference point" mode

0003 Wrong direction key Use correct key

Wrong key used to approach
reference point

0004 External feed interlock This signal must become zero to

External signal for feed cancel feed interlock
interlock exists

0005 Controller disabled

Axis amplifiers have controller
disabled signal (servo OFF);
axis traverse possible after
controller enabling

0006 Hardware end limit Clear•axis by moving it in opposite

One axis has contacted the direction
hardware limit switch

0007 Software limit Clear axis by moving it in opposite

One axis has contacted the direction;
entered software limit if necessary, check parameter

03.96 20.31
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

0008 Barriers Press RESET and clear in

Entered end limit points for opposite direction
chuck and/or tailstock reached

0009 Wrong reference point Approach first reference point

Wrong reference point in program or manually
number has been entered

0101 No mode Check switches;

No mode of operation is check line to interface
selected

0102 No feed value Check limit switch position;

check program;
feed rate value programmed:
check signal line in CHECK
picture

0103 Zero rapid traverse/feed rate Check switch position

Feed rate or rapid traverse
switch set to zero

0105 Spindle stop Check program;

Spindle not rotating despite check pulse encoder + line and
speed programming cable of spindle

0106 No manual travel Check manual travel signal;

An axis has been selected check handwheel; select correct
which cannot be moved axis;
manually check parameter of existing axis

0107 Excess speed Reduce programmed speed

Spindle has reached
excessive speed during
threading

0108 Fixed point axis number illegal:

0109 Start locked Check program;

A "feed stop" signal is reset feed stop (interlock)
present signal

0110 Feed stop Check program;

G 1 feed stop signal is reset feed stop signal
active

1001 Manual travel locked Axis to be traversed in set-

up mode is assigned to a
different subsystem

20.32 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays

1002 Wrong servo designation Check #16 check parameter;

designation of servo print
incorrect

1003 Wrong travel data

When programming axis
allocation: wrong travel data
programmed as a function of
subsystem

1004 Inadequate axis allocation Check program

More than three allocation
-commands programmed; axis
superimposing programmed
during interpolation

1005 Illegal G114to G116- Check program

command
G114 to G116 programmed
while G114 to G116 is already
selected

03.96 20.33
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays

General operating errors: M02....

M02 NEED R.P. RTN I I I I I

Error number
The error display "Approach
M02 reference point" is always
(Error with absolute measurement system) output in conjunction with an
error number, e.g. M02 0007

Error display Cause Remedy

0001 Measuring system error Approach reference point via trip

Data of absolute measuring dog
system (battery) destroyed

0002 Absolute encoder error Approach reference point via trip

dog in "reference point" mode

0003 Zero point error Approach reference point

Permissible tolerance value for
machine zero point entered by
parameter (abslmt) exceeded

0004 Approach reference point

For automatic program
execution the reference points of
all axes concerned must have
been approached

20.34 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays

Abort criteria: T01 ....fT02 ....fT03 ... ./T04....

T01 CAN'T CYCLE ST i ! i ! i The error display "T01" is always

Error number output in conjunction with an
error number, e.g. T01 0007

Error display Cause Remedy

T01 Can't start cycle Check mode of operation;

An NC cycle stop signal is check SET UP mode
present; no cycle start can be
executed with this status

0101 Axis traverse

At least one axis is traversed,
but cycle start is only possible
when all axes are stopped

0102 Not ready This NC alarm must be

An NC alarm is present removed

0103 Reset
RESET signal is present;
automatic start therefore not
possible

0104 Autostop 1 Check program

Automatic stop signal is
present

0105 Limit stop Clear in opposite direction in

Hardware limit switch "machine set-up mode
limit" has been reached

0106 .Software limit Clear axis in opposite direction

The entered limit position has in set-up mode
been reached

0107 Mode Check mode selector switch

Automatic or MDI° mode must
11 11 11

be selected

0108 Two J'l)odes Check position of mode selector

Two modes are active switch and mode signal
simultaneously

0109 Mode change Select correct mode (automatic

mode); press cycle start

[ml

03.96 20.35
TXBF
 CRT (screen) displays

0110 Program input

Selected program is edited in
EDIT mode; cycle start
therefore not possible

0111 Read-in status

Program is being read in;
this program can only be
started after termination of
complete read-in cycle and
subsequent SET-UP

T02 FEED HOLD I I I I I The error display "T02" is always

Error number output in conjunction with an
error number, e.g. T02 0201

Error display Cause Remedy

T02 Feed hold Automatic start can take

A feed stop signal is present place only after eliminating
feed stop situation

0201 Limit stop Clear axis in opposite direction

Hardware limit switch $2 in set-up mode
reached

0202 Software limit Clear axis in opposite direction

Limit entered in $2 reached in set-up mode

0203 NC reset
RESET signal has been sent;
the NC program is aborted and
reset to first block (program
start)

0204 Autostop 2 Check program

Automatic stop signal 2
[feed stop] is present

0205 Mode change Select correct mode

20.36 03.96
TXBF
CRT (screen) displays

T03 BLOCK STOP I I I I I The error display "T03" is always

Error number output in conjunction with an
error number,
e.g. T03 0201

Error display Cause Remedy

T03 Block stop

Execution of program aborted
after termination of one single
block

0301 Single block

Single block signal is present;
program is only executed block
by block

0302 User macro stop

A block stop has been executed Press key
[ml
in this user program

0303 Mode change Select "Automatic" mode;

press key
r t I II
0304 MDI end
Program entered in MDI has
been executed

T04 COLLATION STOP I I I I I The error display 'T04" is always

Error number output in conjunction with an
error number,
e.g. T04 0201

Error display Cause Remedy

T04 Comparison terminated

03.96 20.37
TX8F
 CRT {screen) displays

20.38 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Servo errors: s....

Error display Cause Remedy

Nmi.;_ It is a servo error when, besides the error number, the relevant axis is also displayed.

S01 SERVO ALARM:PR Servo alarm present; error of Remedy alarm;

DJ axes can be read on CRT
(screen) and additionally on
switch NC off

servo amplifier

10 Undervoltage Check supply voltage of servo

amplifier; check for voltage
drops of ;;;, 25 ms

11 Excess speed 2 Check parameter,

Axis speed is too high; ball screw pitch error, speed,
nominal value is too high regulation

12 Memory error 1 Check connector of serial servo

Memory error (RAM) on servo interface; check RF01 print and
amplifier or on control print replace, if necessary; initialise
servo amplifier

13 Clock signal error Check connectors and

Time monitoring of servo connection lines servo and NC;
amplifier tripped if necessary, replace print RF01

14 Watchdog Check connectors; check

EPROM, is it plugged in
properly? Replace print RF01 or
additionally plug in RF31/3

15 Memory error 2 Switch on/off again; check

Dual port RAM checksum error; axi~ control group for loose
malfunction on connecting cable connectors;
between CNC and servo; replace if necessary
parity error on initialisation

03.96 20.39
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

16 Magnetisation error Check pulse encoder;

check connector; cable
breakage?; check servo
parameters STY and MTY; if
everything is OK, replace
control modules

17 Setpoint error OFF/ON switch or replace

Fault on print RF01; RF01 print, if necessary
AID converter not correctly
installed

20 No feedback signal 1
Defective encoder or encoder
plug not plugged in

21 No feedback signal 2
Defective encoder or encoder
plug not plugged in

22 No feedback signal 3
Defective encoder or encoder
plug not plugged in

24 Detection of earth fault

One of the 3 phases (U, V, W)
possibly has an earth contact

25 Battery alarm Batteries of absolute value

encoders must be exchanged;
afterexchange,approach
reference point to protect data

26 Alarm at unused axis section Check power driver

Overcurrent detected in power
unit of an unused half of dual
amplifier

27 Internal cycle error

The servo-internal oscillator
is defective

20.40 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

30 Overcurrent Increase start-up/brake ramps;

Excessive current needed for check OTR parameter; reduce
acceleration or deceleration rapid traverse speed;
additionally install braking unit;
replace braking unit
..

31 Excess speed Check parameters;

Limit speed of motors exceeded check acceleration/deceleration
• 2400 or 3600 rpm time constant;
check gain V61 PGN;
check parameter MTY RNG-PIT;
check cable and encoder;
check smallest traverse
increment

32 Overcurrent Replace servo cable;

Motor control shorted or earth check STY signal direction of
contact rotation;
replace encoder; replace control
print RF01;
replace complete converter
(power section)

33 Overvoltage Check braking unit and

DC component higher than connection;
400V check servo parameters for
correct values

34 Parity error Check CN1A, CN1B connectors;

Transmission errors occur check connecting cables; if
during data transfer between necessary, measure
CNC and servo amplifier interferences (peaks); replace
MC 611/ MC 632

35 Servo data error Check programmed traverse

speed; check connectors and
connecting cables; check for
malfunction and, if necessary,
replace MC 611/MC 632 control
group

03.96 20.41
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

36 Transmission error Rectify as described in 80135

No data transmission between
CNC and servo amplifiers

~ It is a servo error when, besides the error number, the relevant axis is also displayed.
'
802 INIT PARAM ERR Initialisation error Switch off/on again
[D Parameter transmission from
CNC to axis amplifiers was
faulty

37 Parameter error
Errors have occurred during
parameter transmission

~ It is a servo error when, besides the error number, the relevant axis is also displayed.

S03 SERVO ALARM:NR Number of axis concerned is After error rectification, display
[D displayed; read error off the can be cancelled by NC
axis RESET

42 Sensor error 1
Sensor error of motor
encoder

43 Sensor error 2
Sensor error in closed-loop
operation

44 Sensor error

45 Overtemperature Check current consumption;

Temperature monitoring of axis if necessary, replace
amplifiers has responded; temperature monitor
mechanical axis resistance

46 Motor temperature Check motor and mechanism;

if necessary, replace motor

50 Overcurrent 1 Rectify servo parameters

Time out for maximum motor
current set with parameters OLL
and OLT;
incorrect U, V, W wiring;
mechanical resistance

20.42 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

51 Overcurrent 2 Increase time constant;

95% of max. permissible reduce current consumption;
overcurrent has been needed for set servo parameters;
more than 0.5 s check encoder cable;
check for mechanical resistance

52 Position error 1 Check 0D1 parameter;

Machine position is outside check U, V, W wiring;
the defined error window check time constant -
acceleration/deceleration;
replace encoder;
adjust amplifier VG1 PGN

53 Position error 2 Check 0D2 parameter

The machine position is outside
of the defined error window
(when servo "off")

54 Amplifier overloaded
Amplifier was overloaded for
longer than a preset time

55 EMERGENCY STOP
An EMERGENCY STOP signal
has been triggered by the
control system or the servo
amplifiers

56 Axis alarm Read alarm off the servo

Alarm CN1 triggered on one amplifiers;
axis; check input voltage;
contactor for power supply on
"READY" missing control amplifier not activated

N.Qle;_ It is a servo error when, besides the error number, the relevant axis is also displayed.

S52 SERVO WARNING Name of axis where an error has

rn occurred, is displayed

EO Overexcitation
80% of permissible overload of
servo motor reached

E1 Overcurrent
80% of permissible overcurrent
reached

03.96 20.43
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

E3 Position error at absolute sensor

The absolute position counter
value is incorrect.
- Absolute sensor,
- cable,
- or supplementary card
for absolute sensor signal
evaluation (on servo) is
defective

E4 Parameter error
A wrong parameter or value
has been set

E5 Position error LX value servo screen is 278

The absolute measuring system < LX < 4722 or LX > 5070;
is not operating correctly approach reference point; if
necessary, replace measuring
encoder and/or card RF33

E6 Limit stop
Limit stop has been reached;
speed control has been
interrupted

E7 NC EMERGENCY STOP
Control system signals an
EMERGENCY STOP situation to
the servo amplifiers

Nms,: It is a servo error when, besides the error number, the relevant axis is also displayed.

S51 Parameter Error

20.44 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Spindle errors: s.. ..

Error display Cause Remedy

NQta; It is a spindle error when, besides the error number, no axis number is displayed.

S01 SERVO ALARM:PR Alarm can only be removed with

rn NC OFF

S03 SERVO ALARM:NR Alarm can only be removed with

rn NC OFF

10 Voltage tolerance
Supply voltage has exceeded or
fallen below correct value by 10-
15%;
a voltage drop of <! 15 ms has
taken place

12 Memory error 1 Check EPROM;

RAM and PAL components for
correct fit (all PINs)

15 Memory error 2 Check connection cables;

Errors in communication check screw fitting;
between CNC and spindle measure cables for earth
connection or for short circuit

17 Component fault Exchange board

SF-CA/STJ-CAT control board
on converter of main drive has
component fault

20 No tacho signal Measure voltage level -

Encoder installed in motor peak 3 V;
issues incorrect signal if deviation is excessive:
exchange RAM encoder card or
encoder

21 No encoder signal Check CONB cable;

exchange encoder; spindle
positioning?

22 SF-CA contact fault Check installation of SF-CA

card;
exchange card, if necessary

03.96 20.45
TXSF
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays
ik~!'~Mw.l
Error display Cause Remedy

23 Speed tolerance Set parameter VKl=0 to 1;

if motor rotates without speed
display in control system;
check encoder,
check phase u,v,w,
check connecting cables

24 Fuse blown Check complete controller;

if necessary, exchange SF-CA
card or complete unit

25 Braking unit malfunction Check supply voltage;

switch on again;
exchange SF-CA card;
exchange braking unit

26 Phase error Check voltage of the three

phases;
check power supply fuse

27 CPU error Parameter data?

Check NC spindle parameters
and motor parameter list

31 Overspeed Maximum speed too high;

Maximum speed exceeded by wrong parameter setting
15% (excessive oscillations);
check VKP and VKI gain;
set VKP=63, VKl=1,
if an error occurs:
exchange SF-CA/SFJ-CA1
card,
if no error occurs:
optimise motor

32 Overcurrent Set parameter 02 on main drive

amplifier to correct value;
measure power supply, voltage
Short circuit? wave form and phase shift, etc.;
exchange converter

20.46 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

33 Overvoltage Check power supply;

Overvoltage during braking check as described in S0332,
no phase failure:
exchange converter

34 Parity error
Transmission error between
CNC and converter;
disturbance on line

35 Data error Check cable connection; see

also alarm S0315;
plug connection tightened
firmly?

36 Transmission error Exchange MC 611/MC 632

37 Parameter error Check parameter data in

spindle picture CNC and on
converter (list)

45 Overtemperature Check fan (temperature control

Ambient temperature too system); check,temperature
high monitor;
exchange SF-CA/SFJ-CAl card;
reduce current consumption
(parameter)

46 Motor temperature FR-SF connections:

Overload of motor; check OHS1-CON2 pin 3 and
motor fan not running; OHS2-CON2 pin 2;
braking or acceleration times too FR-SFJ connections:
short; check AL 1 and A TB2 or AL2
fan of braking unit not running; and B
TB2 or CON2 interrupted

52 Position error
Encoder gives incorrect value;
parameter ORS2 has
inadmissible value

55 External EMERGENCY STOP Eliminate EMERGENCY STOP

situation; FR-SFJ connection:
parameter 09 must be on 3,
check CON1 pins 47 and 10 for
short circuit check;
parameter OA=3 pins 48 and 10
for short circuit

03.96 20.47
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

56 Servo error Check fastening screws

Termination resistor missing

57 Module missing Install appropriate option

An option card is missing card

t!QJe;_ It is a spindle error when, besides the error number, no axis name is displayed ..

S52 SERVO WARNING Spindle warning Check alarm display on main

IT! spindle drive

EO Voltage drop
Voltage drop has occurred in
power supply

E1 Overload Check working cycle

Motor or converter is over-
loaded

E4 Parameter error
A parameter value is outside
the permissible range

E7 NC EMERGENCY STOP
EMERGENCY STOP signal
from control system present on
converter

20.48 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Module alarms: Y ......

Error display Cause Remedy

Y01 MEMORY ALARM Error in RAM or EPROM

IIIII area .
0001 LOG. RAM error
Error in RAM area of card
MC 111 or MC 411

0002 Error in dual port RAM area Exchange card MC 161

0004 EPROM error Exchange card MC 431/841

Error on ROM card

Y02 SYSTEM ALARM After switching on, an error

occurs on data transfer
III I I between axis control card and
servo amplifier

0002 BUS error Check plug-in connection and

plug-in cards incl. cables

0003 ADDR. error Reinitialise or set correct

Access to wrong address address

0004 Wrong command Check parameters

Wrong command has been
issued

0005 Division by zero Modify program

Not possible

0050 Background processing error

0051 Error data transfer

0052
.
0057 No opt. card Supply opt. card

0060 Parity error Software or hardware error

0061 Parity error Software or hardware error

0062 Parity error Software or hardware error

0063 Parity error Software or hardware error

0064 Parity error Software or hardware error

0065 Parity error Software or hardware error

03.96 20.49
TXSF
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

0066 Parity error Software or hardware error

0067 Parity error Software or hardware error

0068 Parity error Software or hardware error

0069 Parity error Software or hardware error

0070 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0071 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0072 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0073 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0074 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0075 . Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0076 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0077 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0078 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

0079 Amplif. interface error Software or hardware error

Y03 AMP. UNEQUIPPED Axis not connected; Check parameter "sfig";

III II connection amplifier missing check cable connection;
check plug-in connection;
check power supply;
check axis assignment (switch
axis 1 = o, axis 2 = 1 )

Y04 MCP RAM PARITY Exchange servo control module

III I I MCP

VOS !NIT PARAM ERR Initialisation error Switch off/on again

Parameter transfer CNC •
III I I servo and EPROM • RAM
when switching on, NC start-up
faulty

0001 Input error Check parameters of main drive

2
Internal software data, E - servo amplifier
PROM wrong

0002 Invalid parameter value Check parameter #19 RNG, #2

PC2 in servo monitor and set to
permissible values

0003 PARA gear speed 1

No values entered in
parameters #19 RNG, #2 PC2

20.50 03.96
TXBF
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

0004 PARA gear speed 2

Parameters #18 Pit and #1 PC1
missing or not set correctly

VOS mcp no ERROR

III I I
0001 PLC axis error Check MCP no.
' An axis controlled by the PLC
not set correctly in parameter
field

Y07 AMP POWER OFF

III II
0001 S output Check parameter
double entry P1 # 26 sout

0002 S name Check parameter

double entry P1 # 25 sname

0003 S output and S name Check parameter

designated incorrectly P1 #25+#26

Y51 PARAMETER ERR. Wrong axis motion triggers

III II alarm when axes are being
controlled

0001 Rapid traverse error Check linear acceleration or

Parameter #4 LGot has wrong braking
value or is not set

0002 Feed rate error Check PARA #7 LG1t

Feed rate wrong during
acceleration and braking;
parameter is not set

0003 GO braking ramp Check parameter #5 Got and

set to valid value

0004 G1 braking ramp Check parameter #8 Git and

set to valid value

0009 Incorrect Grd spc parameter #4 grdspc must be >0!

value

Y52 INVALID ZP-RTN

III I I

03.96 20.51
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

··~-·---•
System alarms:

Error display
Z../P...

Cause Remedy

201 WATCHDOG 1 Time monitoring of CNC Check corresp. print and

hardware has responded exchange, if necessary

202 SYSTEM ERROR Software error Check software

203 MEMORY PARITY This alarm occurs if wrong data Delete memory;
have been used for arithmetic exchange software;
functions exchange memory card

204 WRITE PROTECT Access to inadmissible function Set corresponding option

(option)

205 DIVIDE BY ZERO Not possible! Modify program

206 CAN'T LOAD MFD No drive system available;

floppy defective;
wrong jumper has been set

207 CRC ERROR

208 FILE AREA ERROR

209 REMOTE 1/0 ERR Connection to second rack

not OK or second rack is
defective

250 INVALID IT

251 EE ROM ERROR

252 BATTERY FAULT Buffer battery exhausted or Charge battery or exchange

defective battery;
check parameters and program
data

253 TEMP.OVER

254 Dl05V DOWN

255 DIO 24V DOWN

256 FIX P REENTRY

257 MC 471/472 ERROR MC 471/472 card is missing or Hardware defective

defective

258 MC462 ERROR MC 462 card is missing or Hardware defective

defective

259 MEM_BX ERROR MEM BX card is missing or Hardware defective

defective

20.52 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

260 MEM_D0 ERROR MEM DO card is missing or Hardware defective

defective

261 MEM_D1 ERROR MEM D1 card is missing or Hardware defective

defective

262 MEM_D0/D1 MEM DO and D1 cards are Hardware defective

ERROR missing or defective

270 ABS. ERROR

271 DETECTOR ERROR

272 POSITION ERROR

273 ABS. WARNING

03.96 20.53
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

General information in MDI, IN/OUT and simulation

EDIT displays

Error displays Cause => and, if necessary, remedy

Search execution Program is searched through;

no error, only message

Search complete Program has been found;

program call-up terminated completely;
no error, only message

Buffer Edit Buffer edit mode has been selected

Input/output not => Select IN/OUT mode

activated

MDI displays:

MDI no setting Only MDI mode selected;

no data available in MDI memory for processing

SET UP MDI complete Activation of an MDI program terminated;

program can be run

MDI entry complete Data input in MDI mode done correctly and completely

MDI program is running Program defined in MDI is running

Activate program Search for program and activate it to obtain an executable

program

Editing Program input mode is active;

a program is being edited

Program running Program to be edited is running;

do not edit when machine is at standstill!

Data IN/OUT displays:

Data in execution Data are read in correctly

EE ROM data storage Data read in by means of parameter tape are being stored in
E2 ROM memory

Data protecting Reading-in of data completed

Compare execution Program or data comparison between punched tape, etc. and
NC memory contents running correctly

Compare complete Data comparison has been terminated

Data out execution Data output to interface is taking place

Data out complete Data output has been terminated

Erase execution Memory is being deleted correctly

20.54 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays
&
EDIT displays

Error display Cause=} and, if necessary, remedy

Merge execution Merging of several programs in one has been called up and is
taking· place

Merge complete

Erase complete

Copy execution Copying is taking place correctly

Copy complete

Condense execution Available data memory is being compressed

Condensing complete .

No. change execution

No. change complete

Graphics

Simulation The program execution is graphically simulated

Test run (Trace) Program is being run in graphics mode trace

Auxiliary functions

Data input disabled Data input switch is not set to INPUT

Procedure complete

Execute procedure

Variable error

03.96 20.55
TXSF
Programming errors: P...

Error display Cause Remedy

P10 EXCS. AXIS No. Too many addresses have been Check program;
specified in this block check number of axes
(parameters)

P11 AXIS ADR. ERROR Wrong axis designation;

axis address contained in
program, but parameter for this
axis is not set;
axis does not exist

P20 DIVISION ERROR Input value is smaller than Check parameters of smallest
smallest increment output resolution

P30 PARITYH Parity error on punched Check punched tape

tape

P31 PARITYV Odd number of characters in Modify block or reset

one block parameter

P32 ADDRESS. Wrong address letter used Correct program

ERROR

P33 FORMAT ERROR Entered values do not Correct program

correspond to permissible
format

P34 G-CODE ERROR G-value contains errors or is Correct program

inadmissible

P35 GMO-VALUE OVER Maximum number of address Modify program

letters exceeded

P36 PROGRAM END No M30/M99 on punched tape Complete program

ERR or in program or sub-routine

P37 PROG. No. ZERO O is not allowed as a program Correct program

number

P38 NO BLOCK SKIP

P39 NO SPEC ERR

P40 PREREAD BL.ERR

P50 NO INCH/MM SPEC Parameter changeover for

inch/mm missing

20.56 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P60 OVER COMP. Programmed traverse exceeds Check input
LENGTH max. permissible value

P61 NO S-DIR SPEC Check spindle parameter;

check program

P62 F-CMD. NOTHING Enter feed rate value in

program

P63 NO GOS SPEC Not used by TRAUB

P70 ARC ERROR Check start and end points

of geometry (angle program};
check sign

P71 ARC CENTER Centre point is not found in Check program

"circular interpolation" when
executing the program

P72 NO HELICAL SPEC Parameter or option and

software for helical interpolation
missing

P73 NO SPIRAL SPEC Parameter or option and

software for helical interpolation
missing

PBO NO G07SPEC Not TRAUB standard! Check options;

Parameter for G07 not set G07-command faulty;
check axis data

P90 NO THREAD SPEC Thread function has been Set option

programmed, but option is not
set

P91 NOG34SPEC G34 (variable thread) has been Set option

programmed, but option is not
set

P92 NO ARC THRO SPC Ch~ck option parameters for

approach and return strategy

P93 SCREW PITCH Check threading cycle and enter

ERR correct pitch

P100 NO G16 Function G16 for circumference Set corresponding parameter

SPECIFIED not set

P110 PLANE CHG (PR)

P111 PLANE CHG (CR)

03.96 20.57
TXBF
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P112 PLANE CHG (CC) G17,G18, G19 programmed

within TRC/MRC; plane
selection or change only
possible outside of G46

P113 ILLEGAL PLANE Programmed angle is not within Correct angle (program)
selected plane

P120 G94 MISSING Check program;

program asynchronous feed
G94

P121 F0ARC MODAL

P122 NO AUTO C-OVR Automatic feed rate reduction Select parameter

for transition radius not
selected

P130 2nd AUX. ADDR Parameter for using a second

M-function not set correctly

P131 NO G96SPEC G96-function not set Check parameter

P132 SPINDLE S=0

P133 G96 P-No. ERR Programmed cutting speed Check program

faulty

P134 X=0 AT V-CMD No diameter input for G97 Correct program

programming

P135 S<O IN S-SPEED S<O entered for G92 Correct program

programming

P140 NO T-POS OFST. Tool correction data missing

for G46

P141 PAT-ROT ERROR

P142 T-OFFS G2 ERR Error with G2 in connection

with TRC/MRC in tool correction
data

P150 NO C-CMP SPEC Option tool nose radius/milling Check parameter,

cutter radius compensation activate G46
(TRC/MRC) not set

20.58 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P151 ERROR G2/G3 Error in connection with G46 Modify program accordingly
AND G46 when programming an arc;
G2/G3 must not be programmed
in combination with G41, G42,
G46 and G40 (in one block)

P152 I.S.P. NOTHING No intersection point found at Check program

geometry transitions for tool
nose or milling cutter radius
compensation

P153 I.F. ERROR G46 Trouble during machining with Check program
TRC/MRC

P154 NO 30-CMP SPEC No 30 compensation is set

P155 F-CYC ERR (CC) No multiple cycle must be used Correct program
with G46;
repeat cycle cancels TRC

P156 BOUND Contour violation occurs when Correct quadrant selected?

DIRECTG46 approaching the contour Check and modify, if
necessary;
use different tool

P157 SIDE REVRSED Compensation direction Select different G-function GOO,

G46 reversed within the selected G28, G30, G33, G53;
TRC/MRC use different quadrant;
- set parameter to cancel
"direction reversal" error

P158 ILLEGAL TIP P. Wrong tool quadrant is used Select correct quadrant
within G46

P160 DATA ERR R+r<O Check cutting radius

compensation

P170 NO CORR. No. No tool number specified for Insert number in program;
G41, G42, G46 check compensation

P171 NO G10 SPEC Parameter for G10-function

missing

P172 G10 L-No. ERR Check parameter value for

permissible L-value and modify,
if necessary

03.96 20.59
TXBF
 CRT (screen) displays

~:-----
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P173 G10 P-No. ERR Check P address value range

and modify, if necessary

P174 NO G11 SPEC Parameter for G11-function

missing

P175 ILL TOOL No. Inadmissible or non-existent tool Correct program

number has been programmed

P180 NO BORING CYC. Check parameter and set drilling

cycles, if necessary

P181 NO S-CMD (fAP) Spindle speed S missing for a Correct program

programmed tapping cycle

P182 SYN TAP ERROR Check connecting cable to pulse

encoder;
if necessary, exchange encoder

P183 PTC/fHD No. Input F or E missing for a Correct program

threading cycle (drilling)

P184 NO PTC/fHD CMD Pitch error when programming in Check program

inches in a tapping cycle

P185 NO TAP CYC SPC Tapping cycle not loaded in the Set parameter
RAM

P186 NEED M3/M4 CMD M3/M4-instructions for direction Complete program

of rotation missing

P190 NO CUTTING CYC Cycles not loaded Read cycle programs into
control

P191 TAPER LENGTH Programmed value must be Check start point

ERROR smaller than permissible axis
traverse

P192 CHAMFERING ERR Entered transition chamfer Check program and change, if
inadmissible in threading cycle necessary, to a permissible
valoe

P193 NO MULTI C SPC Cycles are not loaded in

system

P194 MULTl NEED MDL

P200 NO MRC CYC SPC Load cycles in control

20.60 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P201 PROG. ERR (MRC) Inadmissible G-function defined Check program for finished
in contour description for contour
finished part;
G27/G28, G30, G31, G33 are
not admissible

P202 BLOCK OVER Too many finished contour Modify program for finished
(MRC) blocks for use of roughing contour and reduce number of
cycles blocks (<50)

P203 CONTOUR ERROR The roughing cycles cannot Check roughing cycles
machine the programmed (contour definition)
contour

P204 C-FORMAT ERR A command in cycles G70-G76 Check program

is wrong

P205 E>FAT DOWNCUT In roughing cycles, feed E is Check cycle: E<F

higher than normal feed

P206 START P ERROR Wrong start point has been Modify program
programmed in the cycles

P210 NO PAT CYC SPC Cycles are not in control Set or load cycles

P220 NO SPECIAL CYC Cycle missing Set or load cycles

P221 NO HOLE(S-CYC) Set or load cycles

P222 G36 ANGLE ERR Check program

P223 G12 G13 R ERR

P224 NO G12,G13 SPC

P230 NESTING OVER Permissible amount of sub- Modify program

routine nesting exceeded;
max. 8 permissible

P231 NON-NUMBER In a jump command or sub- Correct program

routine call-up, block number
missing as jump
address

P232 NO PROGRAM No. Sub-routine does not exist Create sub-routine;

enter correct number in program

P240 NO VARBL. SPEC [#00] No variables are defined Delete variable command;
check specification

03.96 20.61
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P241 NO VARI NUMBER A variable has been Change number

programmed that is no longer
within the variable range •
number too high

P242 EQL. SYM. MSSG. "Equals" sign has not been Check and correct variables
entered in a variable definition

P243 VARIABLE ERR. Error when processing program Check and correct value
variables range, quantity, number and
function

P250 NO PAT-ROT SPC

P251 DUPL. PAT-ROT Not used by TRAUB

P252 PAT.& GOOD-ROT

P260 NO GOOD-RT SPC

P270 NO MACRO SPEC Non-existent macro instruction Check macro options;

has been programmed delete macro in program

P271 NO MACRO INT. Non-existent macro instruction Check macro options;

has been programmed delete macro in program

P272 NC/MACRO An NC and a macro instruction Separate instructions in two

ILL. have been used in the same blocks
program block

P273 MACRO OVERCALL Number of macro call-ups too Reduce macro frequency
large

P275 MACRO AGR. EX. Number of arguments in macro Check macro call-up
call-up II too large

P276 CALL CANCEL A macro can only be

deactivated if it has been
selected before

P277 MACRO ALM MESG

P280 EXC. [ ] More than 5 brackets in a Modify program

block

P281 [ ] ILLEGAL Number of brackets used in a

block is odd

20.62 03.96
TXSF
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P282 CALC. IMPOSS. Expression used in an arithmetic Check program

function incorrect • invalid or
faulty computer operation

P283 DIVIDE BY ZERO Not possible! Check program

P284 INTEGER OVER Number with too many positions Check program
has been entered in an
arithmetic operation

P285 OVERFLOW Value assigned to a variable too Check program

VALUE high

P290 IF SNT. ERROR Correct program

P291 WHILE SNT. ERR Correct program

P292 SETVN SNT. ERR Variable name has more than 7 Correct program
characters;
max. number = / characters

P293 DO-END EXCESS More than 27 DO-END· Correct program

instructions in one WHILE
operation

P294 DO-END MMC. When executing the program

from punched tape, no
WHILE/GOTO function can be
used;
this is only possible from NC
memory

P295 WHILE/GOTO TPE WHILE/GOTO function cannot Delete command

be used when executing
program from punched tape;
this is_ only possible from the NC
memory

P296 NO ADR (MACRO)

P297 ADR-A ERR.

P298 PTR OP (MACRO) Macro command when Delete command

executing the program from
punched tape

P300 VER. NAME Designate variables in program

ERROR correctly

P301 VAR NAME DUPLI Variable name exists already in Correct program or assign
the program different name

03.96 20.63
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P350 NO SCALING SPC Computer functions not set in

control

P360 NO PROG. MIRR. Mirror functions not activated in

control

P370 NO OPOS MR SPC Mirror function G68 is not set Check parameter;
delete G68 from program

P380 NO CORNER R/C Simultaneous programming Check parameter;

of rand D modify block

P381 NO ARC RIC SPC P/D is programmed Correct program

simultaneously in chamfer or
radius cycles or in geometry with
transition chamfer/radius

P382 CORNER NO MOVE No consec. movement

programmed after a transition
radius/chamfer

P383 CORNER SHORT Traverse movement in block Correct program

smaller than specified
chamfer/radius values
.
P384 CORNER SHORT Traverse movement in following Correct program
block (next block) smaller than
programmed chamfer/radius
values

P385 GO G33 IN CONR GO or.G33 programmed Correct program

simultaneously in a block with
chamfer/radius value

P390 NO GEOMETRIC1 Specification missing Set corresponding option in

control

P391 NO GEOMETRIC2 Specification missing Set corresponding option in

control

P392 LES AGL (GEOMT) When programming straight line- Check program
straight-line, angle is smaller
than 1°

P393 INC ERR (GEOMT) Within the geometry, second Modify program
block programmed in
incremental

P394 NO G01 (GEOMT) No G01-instruction in a Correct program

geometry block

20.64 03.96
TX8F
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P395 NO ADRS (GEOM1) Wrong axis format in geometry Correct program

definition

P396 PL CHG. (GEOMT) Plane selection has been set in

a geometry block

P397 ARC ERR (GEOMT) Angle input in geometry Correct program

incorrect

P398 NO GEOMETRIC1 B Geometry is not set in parameter Check parameter

data

P399 DIR ERR (GEOM1) Incorrect direction of movement Correct program

in a geometry block

P400 NO POLE-COORDI Check Polyforrn parameters

P410 NO ADDRS. CHG. Specified address is wrong Check address format and
parameter

P420 PARAMETER Parameter input is not possible; Check parameter

ERRORG10 G-function for parameter
processing missing

P421 PARM. IN ERROR Specified parameters are Correct program

inadmissible;
a wrong G-command has been
entered;
parameter input programmed
within cycles or TRC/MRC

P422 NOT PARA SPEC Tool parameters missing

P423 NO T/H/W ADRES Tool addresses missing Check tool/offset parameter

data

P424 ILL PARA No. Inadmissible parameter number Correct program

programmed

P430 AXIS NOT RET.

P431 NO 2ndREF. SPC Second G-command (G30) not

programmed

03.96 20.65
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P432 NO G29SPEC

P433 NOG27SPEC

P434 COLLATION ERR Not used by TRAUB!

P435 G27/M ERROR

P436 G29/M ERROR

P~37 NO TOOL P SPEC Value for tool changing point not Correct program
set

P438 TOOL P X=Z=O

P440 NO GOOD-PRESET Check coordinates

(parameters) and set appropriate
machine data

P450 NO CHUCK BARR. No chuck barriers set; Set barriers

parameter values

P451 NO PROG. LIMIT Set specification for end limit;

check value for end limit

P452 MOVEMENT LIMIT A programmed level distance Correct program

(end point) has been reached;
this point is within the monitored
end positions or barriers

P460 TAPE 1/0 ERROR Error during reading in or output

of macro functions

P461 FILE 1/0 FEHLER Access to active NC program

not possible

P462 DNC ERROR Data transfer error Check connection to interface

P480 NO MILL SPEC Parameter (option) for Polyform

is not set

P481 MILL ILL.G Inadmissible G-function used for Correct program

milling

P482 MILL ILL.AXIS When milling, C is not allowed Program correct axis
as motion axis

20.66 03.96
TXBF
CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P483 CANCEL SHIFT X Check zero point shift in X;

set X = 0

P484 MILL AXIS RET. Before calling up milling

routines, the C-axis or other
participating axes must be
moved to their reference point
P485 MILL ILL.MODAL Deactivate selected milling cutter
radius compensation by G40

PSOO NO G110 SPEC Check parameter

P501 ILL.G110 STATE

P502
- ILL.G110 $No. Wrong or no slide specified Correct program

P503 ILL.G110 AXIS Inadmissible travel axis Correct program

P600 NOAUTOTLM. Cycle for automatic tool

measurement not set

P601 NO GOB SPEC. Measurement option not set Check G-function parameter
(G31}

P602 GOB ONLY $1 Function only set for one

subsystem

P603 MEASURING Check speed

SPEED
ISO

P604 G37 ILL. AXIS No axis or more than one axis Correct program
in motion during automatic tool
measurement

P605 T-CMD IN BLOCK A T call-up programmed in the Correct program

same block as automatic tool
length calculation

P606 NO T-CMD BEFOR No T call-up programmed Correct program

before automatic tool length
calculation

P607 MEASURING Parameter values in G-function

SIGNAL not correct for automatic tool
ERROR length calculation

03.96 20.67
TX8F
 CRT (screen) displays
NC error displays

Error display Cause Remedy

P608 SKIP ERROR (CC) Measuring cycle must not be

used with tool or milling cutter
radius compensation

P990 PREPRO S/W ERR lnterpolator software PREPRO Check program, check NC
DATA contains an error software state

P991 AUTO PROG.ERR Program error during automatic Correct program

program run

P992 BASIC PROG ERR Error in basic software Delete memory and reload basic
software

20.68 03.96
TXBF
 Nachdruck - auch auszugsweise -
nur mit Einverstandnis der TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

Reprint of any section or extract is subject to our written consent

TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

Toute reproduction, meme partielle,

n'est autorisee qu'avec le consentement de la societe
TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

La reimpresi6n de textos - aunque sea en extracto -

requiere la autorizaci6n de la Firma TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

A reimpressao de textos - mesmo parcial -

s6mente com licen9a da Firma TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

Ristampa - anche per estratto -

solo con ii cosenso della ditta TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

Gengivelse - herunder i uddrag -

er kun tilladt med samtykke fra TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

Kopiering - aven utdrag -

far endast ske med tillstand av TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

Jalkipainos - osittainenkin -
sallittu ainoastaan TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH:n luvalla

Nadruk - ook uittreksels -

enkel met toestemming van TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

Ava-ruxcocr11 -ax.6µ11 x.m wroo:n:acrµanx.ci- µ6vo µE 'tTJ cruyxa-rci-OEOTJ 'tTJS TRAUB

µ11x,aw,; 'tOQVEWTJS E.II.E.
[1RAUlt]
TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH
HauffstraBe 4
D-73262 Reichenbach/Fils

TRAUB Drehmaschinen GmbH

Postfach 1180
D-73258 Reichenbach/Fils

Telefon 07153/5 02 - 0
Telefax 07153/50 25 55

Internet
http://www.traub.de

E-Mail
[email protected]